JP2020065819A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with increased game interest.SOLUTION: When the operation mode of a performance movable body is a first mode, it is easy to determine a first display mode as the display mode of the corresponding display, and when the operation mode of the performance movable body is a second mode, it is easy to determine a second display mode as the display mode of the corresponding display. When a movable body advance notice is executed, the corresponding display of an advance notice target is changed to the display mode of a movable body operation suggestion determined herein, before the movable body advance notice is executed. Therefore, the operation mode of the performance movable body can be suggested by the display mode in which the corresponding display is changed. When a state is controlled to a setting change state, control is not executed even when a variation pattern designation command is received. When a state is controlled to a setting check state, control is not executed even when the variation pattern designation command is received.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine having different jackpot expectations depending on the type of special hold display has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-234836, A

  With the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it has not been possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable object for production (for example, movable body for production 4AK001L, which can be changed to a plurality of types of modes including the first mode (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R),
Holding storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding storage;
Corresponding to the pending storage, a pending display means (for example, in the image display device 5) capable of displaying pending display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun). And a production control CPU 120) for displaying a hold display,
The production movable body,
When the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
When the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
The case where the hold display is displayed in the second display mode is easier to change to the second mode than the case where the hold display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6). (D))
further,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing a game,
Based on information (for example, production control command) from the game control means, production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the setting change operation is executed), the setting change unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change value change process) that can be controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. Part) and
The effect control unit can cause a predetermined effect unit (for example, the image display device 5) to perform an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern specifying command) that specifies execution of variable display,
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting change state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control). The CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if it receives the variation pattern designation command while it is controlled to the setting change state, and therefore does not execute the control based on the receipt of the variation pattern designation command).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to such a configuration, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

(2) Another gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable object for production (for example, movable body for production 4AK001L, which can be changed to a plurality of types of modes including the first mode (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R),
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for displaying an active display on the image display device 5),
The specific display means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun),
The production movable body,
When the specific display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
The case where the specific display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the specific display is displayed in the first display mode (see, for example, FIG. 8-6). (D))
further,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing a game,
Based on information (for example, production control command) from the game control means, production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a setting confirmation operation is performed), a setting confirmation unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Part) and
The effect control means can cause a predetermined effect means (for example, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9) to perform an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern specifying command) that specifies execution of variable display. Is possible,
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control). The CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and therefore does not execute the control based on the receipt of the variation pattern designation command).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. According to such a configuration, even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
In the case where the holding display (specific display) is displayed in the first display mode, the effect movable body is more displayed in the first display mode than when the hold display (specific display) is displayed in the second display mode. You may make it easy to change to the said 1st aspect (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The hold display means (specific display means) is capable of displaying the hold display (specific display) so that the operation of the hold display (specific display) and the operation of the effecting movable body are made to correspond to each other. Good.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The production movable body,
It is provided so that players can touch it,
The temperature may be changed in a plurality of stages, and the temperature may be changed to a higher temperature in the second mode than in the first mode (for example, 8-6 (B)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The production movable body may be changed in different periods depending on whether it changes to the first mode or the second mode.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An operation control unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the operation of the effect movable body is provided,
The operation control means, during the period from when the operation of the effect movable body is suggested by the hold display (specific display) until the operation of the effect movable body is executed, the operation of the effect movable body. Other motions may be restricted (for example, if it is determined in step 4AKS002 that the pre-reading notice is already being executed, no new pre-reading notice or moving body motion suggestion is executed).
According to such a configuration, the production can be smoothly advanced.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step 120AKSA12) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means capable of controlling to a change permission state in which the setting means is allowed to change with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 112 which executes processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01 and 120AKSA02). When,
A movable member that can be operated according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014, a movable object for production 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.),
At least movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member (for example, step AKS012 power-on command processing for executing the command processing, etc.)),
The movable control unit may perform control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) in the change permission state.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step 120AKSA12) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means capable of controlling to a change permission state in which the setting means is allowed to change with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 112 which executes processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01 and 120AKSA02). When,
A movable member that can be operated according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014, a movable object for production 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.),
At least, a movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the original position (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012),
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
In the change permission state, the control for executing the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, since the returning operation for returning the movable member to the original position is not executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

Further, the modes for carrying out the invention described below include the inventions according to the following means (10) to (14). Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902 in a gaming machine,
Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko game machine, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on the command indicating that the main board side is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is transmitted to the production control board side. Was announced. In such a gaming machine, there is room for improvement due to insufficient measures taken when an irregular command is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(10) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing a game,
Based on information (for example, production control command) from the game control means, production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for example, the setting change operation is executed), the setting change unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting change value change process) that can be controlled to the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed. Part) and
The effect control unit can cause a predetermined effect unit (for example, the image display device 5) to perform an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern specifying command) that specifies execution of variable display,
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on the information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting change state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control). The CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if it receives the variation pattern designation command while it is controlled to the setting change state, and therefore does not execute the control based on the receipt of the variation pattern designation command).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

(11) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing a game,
Based on information (for example, production control command) from the game control means, production control means (for example, production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production,
Setting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Based on the establishment of a specific condition (for example, a setting confirmation operation is performed), a setting confirmation unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting variable value confirmation process) that can be controlled to a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed. Part) and
The effect control means can cause a predetermined effect means (for example, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9) to perform an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern specifying command) that specifies execution of variable display. Is possible,
The predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, for effect control). The CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and therefore does not execute the control based on the receipt of the variation pattern designation command).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (11) above,
It is possible to analyze the information from the game control means until the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, and then discard the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, The production control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (12) above,
The effect control means,
Based on setting change start information (for example, a set value change start notification command) accompanying the start of the setting change state from the game control means, setting change information indicating that the setting change state is controlled ( For example, set to display an image notifying that the setting is being changed),
Based on the setting confirmation start information (for example, a set value confirmation start notification command) that accompanies the start of the setting confirmation state from the game control means, the setting confirmation information indicating that the setting confirmation state is controlled is set ( For example, it is set to display an image notifying that it is in the setting confirmation state).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to show that the control is being performed in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the predetermined effect is produced. It is possible to prevent the means from malfunctioning.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (10) to (13) above,
The predetermined effect means performs an operation based on the operation confirmation information even when being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state (for example, as shown in 40FS020 of FIG. 13C, Even when controlled to the setting change status or the setting confirmation status, the control according to the test command is executed).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a predetermined operation of the rendering means based on the operation confirmation information even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled.

  The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the timer interruption processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows one example of production control process treatment. It is a figure which shows the operation example of the production movable body which concerns on the characteristic part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the function structure of the production | generation movable body which concerns on the characteristic part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | operation production operation which concerns on the characteristic part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | operation production operation which concerns on the characteristic part 4AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the pre-reading advance notice setting processing concerning the characteristic part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the determination rate etc. in the prefetching notice setting process which concerns on the characteristic part 4AK. It is a figure which shows the determination rate etc. in the prefetching notice setting process which concerns on the modification of the characteristic part 4AK. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine with the gaming machine frame opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a loss variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing in characteristic part 112IW. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing in characteristic part 112IW. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing in characteristic part 112IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the process performed when a power supply is turned on. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the display monitor in a setting change process. It is the flowchart which shows another example of production control main processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the initial operation which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a figure which shows the control pattern which concerns on the characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power-on in a modification concerning a characteristic part 72AK. It is a flow chart which shows an example of command processing at the time of power supply concerning the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the setting confirmation notification screen which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a game information display part. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a special symbol display device. It is a figure showing the shift mode of the 1st reservation indicator and the 2nd reservation indicator. It is a figure which shows the aspect for every big hit classification in a round indicator. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various jackpots. (A) is an explanatory view showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanation diagram showing a big hit variation pattern judgment table (for big hit B, big hit C), (C) FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern determination table for loss. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a figure which shows the display mode of a display monitor, (C) is explanatory drawing of a display content. It is a time chart which shows the display time of the item displayed on a display monitor. It is explanatory drawing explaining the change of the display content of a display monitor. It is a flow chart which shows game control main processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM clearing process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of the RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of a display monitor. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of the display monitor at a cold start, and (B) shows a display mode of the display monitor at the time of occurrence of a set value abnormality error or at the time of recovery from power failure during setting change. It is a figure. (A) is a diagram showing a change in the display mode of the special symbol display device, the hold display device, the right-handed lamp, and the round display device during execution of the setting change process, and (B) is a set value error error, or It is a figure which shows the change of the display mode of the special symbol display device at the time of returning from the power failure during setting change. It is a figure which shows a part of timer interrupt process for game controls. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the information memorize | stored in RAM and the state cleared. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notification mode at the time of starting a pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. It is a figure which shows the operation speed in operation | movement of non-detection operation control and operation control for real operation confirmation. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the change timing of the set value and the confirmation end timing of the set value, and the number of times the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process are executed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of an image display apparatus. It is a flow chart which shows power failure detection processing. It is the flowchart which shows a part of production control process treatment. 7 is a flowchart showing a setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. 7 is a flowchart showing a set value confirmation process in the characteristic unit 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop start processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a flow chart which shows the game stop end processing in characteristic part 10F. It is a figure which illustrates the effect control command in the characteristic part 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing in the feature section 40F. It is the flowchart which shows the sub side game stop processing in the feature section 40F.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot into the game area by being shot from a predetermined hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a variable display (also called a special drawing game) of special symbols (also called a special drawing) as a plurality of types of special identification information. There is provided a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described later). The change includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of the special symbol and the normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed in a blinking manner. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variation.

  The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols". Further, a special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and a special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. The special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special drawing game and the second special drawing game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern showing numbers etc.) Variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special drawing game or the second special drawing game, the decorative pattern is variably displayed (for example, up and down) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Direction scroll display or update display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative design which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

  A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are being held is also called the number of held storages. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also called a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also called a second reserved memory number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

  In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B that are configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs to be lit. To display the first reserved storage number, and the second reserved display unit 25B displays the second reserved storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port which is always kept in a fixed open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When the game balls enter the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls can be paid out and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is located. Is close to the prize winning ball device 6A, and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (the second starting winning opening is also closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening will be open.) When the game balls enter the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the device including the electric tulip type accessory as long as it can be changed between the closed state and the open state.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places on the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning openings 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (eg, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening door is a special area that changes between an open state and a closed state. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for special electric auditors) is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning hole. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is in the ON state, the special winning opening door opens the special winning opening, and the game ball easily enters the special winning opening. Become.

  When the game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (eg, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as a "winning prize". In particular, the winning of the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also called a starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1), a normal symbol display device 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of a normal symbol as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a universal figure game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, the universal figure game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display device 20, a universal symbol holding display device 25C is provided. The universal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored universal figure reserves, which is the number of regular figure games pending for execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game balls and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an outlet for taking in the game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting a sound effect and the like are provided at upper and left positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in a peripheral portion of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls or the game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied (stored) to the ball striking device. A ball hitting plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a stick controller 31A that can be held by a player and can be tilted is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that the player can press. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the operation (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of game progression)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by the player's rotating operation of the hit ball operation handle 30 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal figure game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the previous execution period of the general-purpose game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, but the general-purpose game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , The universal figure game based on the passage is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this public figure game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol for a regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol is "per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, as a fixed ordinary symbol, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When the "universal figure hit" is reached, opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning port is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In addition, when the game ball enters into the starting winning opening (winning prize) while the special drawing game is being executed, or during the period when it is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state which will be described later (starting winning occurs, If the special drawing game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special drawing game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later.) As a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit" symbol and a big hit symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, it is a “small hit”. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, "missing" will occur.

  After the display result in the special figure game is "big hit", the big hit game state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game is "small hit", the small hit game state is controlled.

  In the big hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is one of the elapse timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will be continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as an open upper limit period hereinafter. In this way, one cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by entering the game ball into the special winning opening. Therefore, the big hit game state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the big hit game state, and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  The type of big hit is set in "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and maximum open period) of the special winning opening, and game states after the big-hit game state (described later, normal state, time saving state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared. The type is set. As the big hit type, a big hit type that can obtain many prize balls or a big hit type that has few prize balls or hardly obtain prize balls may be provided.

  In the small hit game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as in the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the special winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

  After the big hit game state is finished, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability changing state according to the big hit type.

  In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) that shortens the average special figure variation time (period during which the special figure varies) compared to the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by reducing the average figure change time (the period during which the figure changes) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of being "Public hit" in the figure game from the normal state, The control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol is improved and a "big hit" is likely to occur.

  The time saving state and the probability changing state are continued until one of the ending conditions such as that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times and the next big hit game state has been started. The condition that the ending condition is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as the number of times cut (shortening of times of times cut, probability change of times of cut etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than special states such as a big hit game state, which is advantageous for the player, a time saving state, a probability variation state, etc., and the display result in the figure game is "universal figure win". Probability and probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit”, the pachinko gaming machine 1 returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the initial setting state (for example, when the system is reset). The state is controlled in the same way as when the processing is not executed).

  A state in which the probability variation control is executed is also referred to as a high accuracy state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not executed is also referred to as a low accuracy state. A state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the time saving state is a low accurate high base state, the definite change state is a high accurate high base state, and the normal state is a low accurate low base state. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as the highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state is finished, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the special figure game display result is "small hit" is continuously controlled (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the predetermined number of special figure games in the above-mentioned number of times cutting, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that “small hit” may not be provided as the display result of the special figure game.

  The gaming state may change based on that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a certain change state after the big hit game state.

(Progress, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (notification of the progress status of the game and / or excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. However, in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 is performed. May be performed by turning on / off the light, the operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided on the image display device 5, as the effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the first special figure game. In response to the start of the 2 special drawing game, the variable display of the decorative design is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) becomes the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. ) Is also stopped (displayed).

  In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination described later, the decorative pattern which is not still stopped and displayed is variably displayed. Is an aspect in which

  In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also called a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation degree) in which the display result (the display result of the special drawing game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) is “big hit” according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. Reach productions include, for example, normal reach and super-reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the design is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative pattern (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed together on a predetermined effective line in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of "probability variation big hit" which is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the big hit game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and after the end of the big hit game state, the probability change state. In the case of "non-probability variation big hit (normal big hit)" that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6" etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd decorative pattern is also referred to as a probability variation design, and the even decoration pattern is also referred to as a non-probability variation design (normal design). After reaching the reach mode with the non-probabilistic variation pattern, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probability variation big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", as a display result of the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative design (for example, "" 1 3 5 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative patterns forming the chances are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state of a mode similar to small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special drawing game is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as "non-reach-miss") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach-miss"). Further, when the display result is “miss”, after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach miss”). (Also referred to as) the fixed decorative pattern may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The notice production includes a notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed and a look-ahead notice production that gives a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before the execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, once the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative design and then the variable display is resumed, one variable display is simulated like multiple variable display. You may make it perform a pseudo continuous production.

  Even during the big hit game state, a big hit mid-game production for notifying the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit medium effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, the small hitting medium production which notifies the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, in some big hit type (the big hit type of the big hit game state of the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type which makes the following game state high accuracy state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not be able to know whether the present is in the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, it is not possible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state by executing a common effect after the small hit game state and after the large hit game state. May be.

  Further, for example, when the special drawing game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and progresses in the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of special figure game (including hold management), execution of ordinary figure game (including hold management), big hit It has a function of controlling the gaming state, the small hitting gaming state, the gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described below, effect control commands described below, data such as various tables referred to when making various determinations described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts the numerical value data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 is, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display device 20, first hold) An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the universal figure hold display device 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

  The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or a game ball passes) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, starting opening switch (first starting opening switch 22A and second starting opening switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering is transmitted and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By the transmission of the detection signal, the passage or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as a part of the control of the progress of the game, production control board (command for designating (notifying) the progress status of the game etc.) according to the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of the special figure game (including a big hit type), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), The status of the game (for example, start and end of variable display, status of opening big winning opening, occurrence of winnings, number of held storages, game status), command for designating error, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, Various functions such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery are included).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described functions of the effect control board 12, and an effect to be executed). (Including the determination of)). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the effect execution based on a detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and is a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays the effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designating signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output the sound in synchronization with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Alternatively, a lamp signal (a signal that specifies a lamp on / off state) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L, 8R, drives the speakers 8L, 8R based on the sound designating signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designating signal from the speakers 8L, 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

  It should be noted that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control for turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 updatable counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 transmits, for example, an input port for taking in the production control command transmitted from the main board 11 and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port of.

  Substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the effect control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also referred to as sub substrates. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operation of the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main processing shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets an interruption prohibition (step S1). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Then, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control command is received, the effect control CPU 120 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, for example, in the image display device 5.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop time process immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop process, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection processing includes processing for adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, and therefore the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which directs recovery from power failure to production control board 12 (Step S7). Along with this, a production control command for designating a backed-up game state before power interruption, and a production control for designating a display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may make it transmit a command. For these commands, the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the production control CPU 120 receives the production control command that specifies the time of restoration from power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that recovery from power failure has been performed or is being restored from power failure. The screen is displayed to The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is taken at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, and thereby the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not the detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Then, by executing a predetermined main side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots) supplied to a computer for hall management installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, starting information (starting) Data such as information indicating the number of winnings and the like, probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) is output (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby executing and holding the special symbol game, controlling the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controlling the game state, etc. See below).

  Following the special symbol process process, a normal symbol process process is executed (step S26). CPU103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41) execution and hold management, It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "universal figure". The ordinary figure game is executed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure hold display device 25C is turned on to display the number of held ordinary figure patterns.

  After the normal symbol process process is executed, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing the holding information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of holding memories is executed. When the start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the big hit type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as holding information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the holding information and the number of holding memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of holding memories, and the pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the start winning set to be transmitted in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. In addition, in the special symbol normal process, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit" and "big hit" type Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). In addition, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special drawing game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order winning).

  When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process uses a random value for fluctuation pattern determination to select one of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not to display "big hit" or "small hit". It includes the processing to determine. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special drawing game (special drawing change time) (also the execution time of variable display of the decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not reach etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern. Is specified, and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol fluctuation processing, the processing which does the setting in order to change the special design in the 1st special design display 4A and the 2nd special design display 4B and the elapsed time after that special design starts fluctuation It includes the process of measuring. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

  The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes a process to set up for. When the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "miss", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "Small hit" or "Loss", the game state is updated when the time cut state or the probability variation state is controlled and the cut-out is completed. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

  The big hit opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This big hit opening pre-processing includes processing for starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening in the open state based on the fact that the display result is "big hit". Has been. When the special winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period for opening the special winning opening and an upper limit number of executions of the round are set according to which the big hit type is. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening preprocessing is completed.

  The big hit opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time after the big winning opening is opened, and the big winning opening based on the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return the open state from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The big hit opening process is terminated.

  The post-big hit opening process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This big jackpot post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round to open the big winning opening has reached the set upper limit number of executions, when the maximum number of executions has been reached, the big hit game state It includes the process of setting to terminate the. When the round execution count has not reached the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution number, the special figure process flag The value is updated to "7". After the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing is ended.

  The big hit ending process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This big hit end processing, waiting processing until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect as the effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed, and the probability change corresponding to the end of the big hit game state It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the display result of "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing is ended.

  The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small hit opening process is the process of measuring the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening and the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time etc. A process for determining whether or not it is included. When the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached by returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small hitting open process ends.

  The small hit ending process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". The small hitting end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting game state is executed. Here, when the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hitting end processing ends.

(Main operation of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12. Register settings of the installed CTC (counter / timer circuit) are performed. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation are executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on the CTC register setting, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated each time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disabled state is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port of the input ports included in the I / O 125 that receives the control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 via the relay substrate 15. The effect control command fetched at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or the RAM 122 is stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received, the content specified by the effect control command, and the like can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. The reception flag provided is turned on. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

  After the command analysis process is executed in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and the movable body 32. The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of, is performed. Further, with respect to the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process processing of step S76, effect random number updating processing is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice production are performed based on the effect control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold memories specified by the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of a decorative design in the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative display variable display (fixed decorative pattern), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various types The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, and execution start timing are determined. Then, the effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result or the like is set. Then, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in response to the instruction to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control section 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. Or driving the movable body 32, outputting voices or sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the sound control board 13, and sending commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control is performed during variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the variable display end of the decorative design is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating that the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed from the main board 11 is received. Corresponding to what has been done, the fixed decorative design which is the display result of the decorative design is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative design is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display effect effect processing ends.

  The special figure winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3". In the special figure winning waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main board 11. Then, when the production control command for designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command designates the start of the big hit game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6. Update to ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hitting. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving the command designating to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “miss”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the special figure hit waiting process ends.

  The effect process during the small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is "4". In this small hitting production effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. .. Further, in the small hitting production process, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small winning finish production, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small hitting game state from the main board 11. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

  The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hitting end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect processing is ended.

  The big hit mid-hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit mid-game production process, the CPU 120 for production control sets, for example, a production control pattern or the like corresponding to the contents of the production in the big hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big hit midfield effect process, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big hit game state from the main board 11. It updates to "7" and finishes the big hit midfield effect process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit game state, and performs various kinds of effect control of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description was a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but encloses the game medium and gives points based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  What is displayed during variable display of the special symbol is only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-"), and variable display may be performed by repeating display and extinction of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

  In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus when the stop symbol combination is a specific symbol combination when the symbols are stopped according to the operation of the stop button by The present invention can be applied to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus) are mounted.

  The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to the form distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a detachable recording medium, and the computer device or the like in advance. It may be distributed by being installed in the storage device included in the. Further, the program and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode can be executed not only by mounting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in the internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed by using the hardware resources of the other device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  It should be noted that in the present specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the effect (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) is “0%”. May be included. For example, it is also included that one is a ratio of "0%" and the other is a ratio of "100%" or a ratio less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 4AK)
Next, the characteristic part 4AK will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic unit 4AK is provided with effect moving bodies 4AK001L and 4AK001R as movable objects that operate according to the effect. The production movable body 4AK001L is provided at the upper left position of the gaming machine frame 3, and the production movable body 4AK001R is provided at the upper right position of the gaming machine frame 3. The movable body for production 4AK001L and the movable body for production 4AK001R are also collectively referred to as a movable body for production 4AK001. The effecting movable body 4AK001 is provided so as to be able to perform a projecting (advancing) operation toward the outside (obliquely left and right upward) of the gaming machine frame 3. In this way, the production movable body 4AK001 is operable to change the outer shape of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the characteristic portion 4AK, the speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the lower left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 and the like.

  Next, an operation example of the production movable bodies 4AK001L and 4AK001R will be described with reference to FIG. 8-1. FIG. 8-1 (A) shows the case where the production movable body 4AK001 is at the origin position (position before operation), and FIG. 8-1 (B) shows the production movable body 4AK001 at the advanced position (half projection). 8-1C, the case where the effectable movable body 4AK001 is at the post-operation position (the maximum protruding position) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 8A to 8C, in the production movable body 4AK001, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 constituting the production movable body 4AK001 is provided outside the gaming machine frame 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1). It is designed to project (advance).

  As shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), when the production movable body 4AK001 is at the origin position (position before operation), the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is completely stored in the gaming machine frame 3. Become.

  For example, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 projects outwardly in response to the normal rotation of the motor included in the production movable body 4AK001 and the normal rotation of the drive gear. Further, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is housed in the gaming machine frame 3 in response to the reverse rotation of the motor and the reverse rotation of the drive gear.

  It should be noted that the effect movable body 4AK001L and the effect movable body 4AK001R can transmit control signals to each of them, and are provided such that one of them can be controlled in operation. Therefore, the production movable body 4AK001L and the production movable body 4AK001R can simultaneously perform the same operation (projection operation, storage operation), or can operate only one of them. For example, the production movable body 4AK001L and the production movable body 4AK001R are also capable of alternately projecting. Further, although the movable body for production 4AK001L and the movable body for production 4AK001R can perform vibration operation and temperature control, these operations and control can be performed one by one. By doing so, various effect operations can be realized.

  FIG. 8-2 is a diagram showing a functional configuration of the production movable body 4AK001. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the movable body for production 4AK001 (the movable body for production 4AK001L and the movable body for production 4AK001R) includes a rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, a drive unit 4AK011, a position detector 4AK012, a touch sensor 4AK013, and a vibration drive unit. 4AK014 and a temperature control unit 4AK015. The production movable body 4AK001 is connected to the production control board 12 and operates under the control of the production control CPU 120.

  The rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is a rod-shaped member (an accessory) that performs the projecting operation as shown in FIG. 8A in the production movable body 4AK001.

  The drive unit 4AK011 includes a motor, a drive gear, a belt, and the like, and performs a projecting operation of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 and a storing operation for ending the projecting. The drive unit 4AK011 drives the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 based on a control signal from the effect control board 12 to perform a projecting operation or a storing operation.

  In the position detector 4AK012, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is located at the origin position (the state where the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is completely stored) or the post-operation position (the position where the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 has maximally protruded and the position where the protrusion operation is completed). It is composed of a sensor (for example, a photo sensor, a pressure sensitive sensor, a button) capable of detecting the presence. The position detector 4AK012 can grasp the current position of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and can determine whether or not the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is operating normally.

  The touch sensor 4AK013 is a sensor (for example, a capacitance type touch sensor or a pressure sensor) capable of detecting that the player has touched the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and is provided, for example, on the tip portion or the side surface of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010. To be The position detector 4AK012 and the touch sensor 4AK013 can transmit the detection result to the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, the contact-type touch sensor 4AK013 detects that the player has touched the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, but a non-contact sensor such as an infrared sensor or an optical sensor detects the rod-shaped part. It may be possible to detect or infer that the player has touched the object 4AK010.

  The effecting movable body 4AK001 is provided at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3, and thus can be contacted by the player. When the touch sensor 4AK013 detects contact with the effecting movable body 4AK001 (the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) during operation of the effecting movable body 4AK001, safety is ensured or effected depending on the frequency, intensity, or timing of the contact. In order to prevent damage or failure of the movable body 4AK001, its operation may be stopped or error notification or warning may be given.

  The vibration drive unit 4AK014 is composed of a vibration motor or the like incorporated in the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and performs the vibration operation of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010. The vibration drive unit 4AK014 vibrates the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 based on a control signal from the effect control board 12. In addition, the vibrating operation of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 may be performed by the drive unit 4AK011.

  The temperature control unit 4AK015 is composed of a thermoelectric element (for example, a Peltier element) incorporated in the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, and heats and cools the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010. The rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is composed of a heat transfer member such as metal in order to enable the temperature control by the temperature control unit 4AK015. Since the player can experience the temperature change by touching the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010, the production is diversified.

  A temperature sensor may be provided to monitor the temperature of the rendering movable body 4AK001 (particularly, the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010). When the temperature of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is equal to or higher than the predetermined upper threshold value or equal to or lower than the lower threshold value, the operation of the movable body for production 4AK001 and the temperature control unit are performed to ensure safety and prevent failure. The temperature control by 4AK015 may be stopped. Further, if the target temperature is not reached within a predetermined period after the temperature control by the temperature control unit 4AK015 is started, it is determined that the temperature control unit 4AK015 is out of order, error notification is executed, and the subsequent temperature The control may be stopped. Further, the upper limit threshold and the lower limit threshold may be changed depending on the control status of the production movable body 4AK001. For example, during the operation of the movable body for production 4AK001, the temperature is likely to increase due to heat of the motor or the like, and thus the upper limit threshold may be increased.

  Next, the effect operation of the characteristic unit 4AK will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic part 4AK, a pre-reading notice effect (movable body notice) for operating the effecting movable body 4AK001 can be executed. Further, prior to the execution of the movable body advance notice, the display mode of the corresponding display (hold display or active display) of the advance notice object is changed to the display mode of the movable body motion suggestion indicating that the movable body advance notice is executed. It is supposed to do.

  FIG. 8-3 shows an example of the effect operation when the movable body advance notice is executed. FIG. 8-3 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Further, the active display area 4AK002 of the image display device 5 displays an active display (also referred to as a specific display), and the hold display area 4AK003 indicates that two hold displays are displayed.

  Here, if a start winning occurs and it is determined to execute the movable body advance notice at the time of starting winning based on the starting winning, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the hold corresponding to the starting winning is held. The display is a snowman icon 4AK021, which is a display mode for suggesting a movable body motion.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, the movable body for production 4AK001 (the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) projects to the advanced position, and then vibrates. In addition, at this time, control for lowering the temperature of the movable body for production 4AK001 is also executed. Such an operation mode is the first mode of the production movable body 4AK001. The vibrating movable body 4AK001 and the decrease in temperature correspond to the cold thing that the snowman icon 4AK021 recalls, and the snowman icon 4AK021 suggests the operation of the movable body 4AK001. it can.

  FIG. 8-4 shows another example of the effect operation when the movable body advance notice is executed. FIG. 8-4 (A) shows that the decorative pattern of the lost combination is stopped in each of the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Further, it is shown that the active display is displayed in the active display area 4AK002 of the image display device 5 and the two hold displays are displayed in the hold display area 4AK003.

  Here, when the variable display based on the hold storage is started, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (C), the hold display is reduced by one, and each "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display is displayed. The variable display is started in the areas 5L, 5C and 5R. When it is determined to execute the movable body advance notice at the start of the started variable display (when it becomes the active display), the active display is displayed by the sun icon 4AK022 which is a display mode of the movable body motion suggestion. It

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 8-4C to 8E, the production movable body 4AK001 (the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010) projects to the post-operation position, and then vibrates. In addition, at this time, control for raising the temperature of the production movable body 4AK001 is also executed. Such an operation mode is the second mode of the production movable body 4AK001. The rise in the temperature of the production movable body 4AK001 corresponds to the warmness of the sun icon 4AK022, and the operation of the production movable body 4AK001 can be suggested by the sun icon 4AK022.

  When the production movable body 4AK001 operates in the second mode, the protrusion degree of the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 is larger than when it operates in the first mode, and it takes time to control the temperature depending on the target temperature. Therefore, it takes time to complete the operation. In this way, since the time required to complete the operation differs depending on the operation mode, the attraction of the effect is improved without monotonous effect. Note that the time until completion of the operation may be controlled to be the same (or substantially the same) regardless of the operation mode. By doing so, it becomes easy to adjust the execution time of the effect and determine the operation mode, and it becomes easy to prevent competition with other effects.

  Next, the pre-reading notice setting process related to the characteristic unit 4AK will be described. FIG. 8-5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the prefetching notice setting process related to the characteristic unit 4AK. The prefetching advance notice setting process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in step S161 of FIG. 7. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning designation command for designating the generation of a starting winning is received from the main board 11 (step 4AKS001). If the start winning award designation command has not been received (step 4AKS001; No), the pre-reading notice setting process is ended.

  If the start winning award designation command has been received (step 4AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the prefetching notice effect is already being executed (step 4AKS002). Whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed may be determined from a pre-reading notice executing flag indicating that the pre-reading notice effect is being executed. If the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 4AKS002; Yes), since no new pre-reading notice effect is executed in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice setting process ends. Therefore, it is determined that the movable body advance notice is executed, and while the movable body action suggestion by the hold display is being performed, another movable body action suggestion by the hold display is executed, and the effect or the notice target is changed. You can prevent it from becoming difficult to understand. In addition, it is possible to prevent the notice of a moving object and the notice of a hold from being duplicated, which makes it difficult to understand the effect or the notice target. It should be noted that even if the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, a new pre-reading notice effect such as a part of the pre-reading notice effect may be executable. That is, when the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed, the execution of a new pre-reading notice effect may be restricted.

  When the prefetching notice effect is not being executed (step 4AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect (step 4AKS003). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of pre-reading notice effects can be executed, and in step 4AKS003, the type of the pre-reading notice effects to be executed together with whether or not the pre-reading notice effects are executed is also determined.

  In step 4AKS003, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and the type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed are determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-6 (A). As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), in this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, a movable body notice, a hold notice, and a stage change notice can be executed.

  The movable body notice is a pre-reading notice production that causes the production movable body 4AK001 to operate in a predetermined operation mode. The hold notice is a look-ahead notice effect in which the display form of the hold display (or active display) is changed to a notice form (eg, blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.) different from the normal form (eg, white). The stage change notice is a look-ahead notice effect in which a plurality of stages (appearing characters, motifs, etc.) in the image display device 5 are provided and the stage is changed. The jackpot reliability is announced in advance depending on the operation mode of the movable body for production 4AK001, the display mode of the hold display (or active display), and the type of stage.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), depending on whether the result of the look-ahead decision is a big hit, super reach loss, or other (non-reach loss, etc.), the execution rate and the execution rate of the look-ahead notice effect are determined and executed. If the type of pre-reading notice effect is different from the determination rate. The determination result of the prefetch determination may be specified from the command given at the time of winning the start prize.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), the jackpot reliability is higher when the pre-reading notice effect is executed than when it is not executed. The jackpots are becoming more reliable in the order of notice. As a result, the jackpot reliability can be announced depending on whether or not the pre-reading announcement effect is executed. In addition, when the super-reach is lost, it is easy to be decided as the stage notice, and when the stage notice is executed, the super-reach is likely to be executed. This can give a notice that superreach is likely to occur. The type and execution rate of the pre-reading notice effect are not limited to this, and it suffices to be able to give notice that the jackpot reliability and the super reach are likely to occur depending on the type and the manner of the pre-reading notice effect. Further, the types of pre-reading notice effects other than the notice of the movable body may be increased or decreased as appropriate.

  Subsequently, it is determined in step 4AKS003 whether or not the prefetching notice effect is not executed (step 4AKS004). When it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (step 4AKS004; No), the pre-reading notice setting process ends.

  When it is determined to execute the prefetching notice effect (step 4AKS004; Yes), it is determined whether to execute the movable body notice (step 4AKS005). When it is determined to execute a process other than the notice of the movable body (step 4AKS005; No), the setting for executing the determined prefetching notice effect is performed (step 4AKS006). In step 4AKS006, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the decided prefetching notice effect is set.

  When it is determined to execute the movable body advance notice (step 4AKS005; Yes), the operation pattern of the production movable body 4AK001 in the movable body advance notice is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step 4AKS007).

  In this embodiment, three types of operation modes of the production movable body 4AK001, that is, the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode are provided as shown in FIG. 8-6 (B). The first mode is an operation mode in which the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 of the production movable body 4AK001 vibrates after operating to the advanced position, and control for lowering the temperature is executed. The second mode is an operation mode in which the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 of the production movable body 4AK001 moves to the post-operation position, and control for increasing the temperature is executed. The third mode is an operation mode in which the rod-shaped accessory 4AK010 of the production movable body 4AK001 vibrates after operating to the post-operation position, and temperature control is not executed. Note that operation modes other than these may be provided.

  A plurality of operation timings of the effectable movable body 4AK001 in the movable body advance notice are provided, and a combination of the operation timing and the operation mode is determined for each operation pattern. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), the operation patterns A1 and A2 that operate when the notice of winning is announced, the operation patterns B1 and B2 that operate when the hold display of notice is shifted, and the notice is active. Operation patterns C1 to C3 that operate when displayed (when the change of the notice target starts), operation patterns D1 to D3 that operate when the reach of the change of the notice target develops, and at the time of staging the change of the notice target (display result derivation) Operation patterns E2 and E3 are provided which operate during agitation. The alphabet in each operation pattern corresponds to the operation timing, and the number corresponds to the operation mode. In the present embodiment, the effecting movable body 4AK001 operates once for each movable body advance notice. However, the effect movable body 4AK001 operates at a plurality of operation timings from the time of winning to the end of the change of the advance notice subject. An operation pattern may be provided. When operating at a plurality of operation timings, each operation mode may be different.

  In the process of step 4AKS007, one of the operation patterns is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C), there are operation modes that are easily determined and operation modes that are not determined (there is an operation mode that is easily executed depending on the operation timing) depending on the operation timing. . By doing in this way, the production becomes versatile. Note that the determination ratios and operation patterns shown in FIG. 8-6 (C) are examples, and there may be operation patterns of combinations of operation modes and operation timings not shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). Further, for example, at an operation timing in which there is a restriction on the time until the operation is completed, an operation mode in which the operation may not be completed may be excluded. In addition, when the operation of the determined operation mode cannot be completed during the change due to the control of the time saving state after the operation mode of the movable body notification is determined, the first mode or the second mode in which the temperature control is performed The operation of the aspect may be restricted and the operation of the third aspect may be performed. Further, when it is decided to execute the movable body advance notice, the time saving control may not be executed until the movable body advance notice is executed.

  Note that the determination rate of the operation pattern may be changed according to the display result (judgment result of the prefetching judgment). By doing so, the display result can be suggested by the operation pattern. For example, in the first mode, the display result (judgment result of the pre-reading determination) is likely to be determined when there is a loss, but when the big hit occurs, the probability of the probability variation big hit may be increased. On the contrary, in the second mode, the display result (judgment result of the pre-reading determination) is likely to be determined in the case of a big hit, but in the case of a big hit, the probability of the probability variation big hit is set to be lower than that in the first mode. Good. By doing so, even if the jackpot reliability is low, it is possible to expect that the jackpot will be controlled in the probability variation state when the jackpot is hit, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, for example, even if the operation timing is the same, the jackpot reliability changes depending on the operation mode by changing the determination rate of the operation mode depending on the display result, so that the player pays attention to the operation mode. In particular, in the second operation mode and the third operation mode, since the advancing operation of the production movable body 4AK001 is the same, but the temperature control is different, the jackpot reliability can be known by the player touching the production movable body 4AK001. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the game. Even if the operation mode is the same, since the jackpot reliability changes depending on the operation timing by changing the determination rate of the operation timing depending on the display result, the player will pay attention to the operation timing. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation mode and the operation timing are determined by determining the operation pattern, but the operation mode and the operation timing may be determined separately.

  Then, the display mode of the corresponding display (moving body motion suggestion) is determined (step 4AKS008). In step 4AKS008, the display mode of the correspondence display is determined according to the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-6 (D). As shown in FIG. 8-6 (D), in the present embodiment, the first display mode (snowman icon) and the second display mode (sun icon) are the display modes of the corresponding display of the movable body motion suggestion. It is provided. The display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body motion suggestion is a display mode of the corresponding display that changes when the movable body advance notice is executed, and is a display mode different from the notice state in the hold advance notice.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6 (D), in the present embodiment, when the operation mode of the effectable movable body 4AK001 is the first mode, the first display is the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body operation suggestion). If the operation mode of the effectable movable body 4AK001 is the second mode, the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body operation suggestion) is likely to be determined as the second display mode. When the notice of the movable body is executed, the corresponding display of the notice target is changed to the display mode of the suggestion of the movable body operation before the notice of the movable body is executed (for example, at the start of operation or several seconds before). It is supposed to do. Therefore, the display mode in which the corresponding display is changed can suggest the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001. Further, since the corresponding display of the notice subject is changed, the change of the notice subject can be easily understood. Even when the movable object for production 4AK001 operates during the variable display (active display) of the notice target, the hold display of the notice target may be displayed in a display mode suggesting the mover action from the time of winning. .

  When the operation mode of the effectable moving body 4AK001 is the first mode in which the control for lowering the temperature is performed, the first display mode (snowman icon) is displayed as the corresponding display (movable body operation suggestion). If the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001 is the second mode executed by the control for increasing the temperature, the second display mode (the sun's It is easy to be decided as an icon). As described above, by facilitating the change of the corresponding display to the icon corresponding to the temperature control of the production movable body 4AK001, the movable body operation suggestion can be more easily understood.

  It should be noted that the manner of associating the effect mode of the movable body motion suggestion with the operation mode of the movable object for production 4AK001 is indirectly suggested by displaying an icon corresponding to temperature or vibration as in the present embodiment. However, the operation of the movable body for production 4AK001 is directly displayed, or the display is interlocked by performing the same display operation during the same period as the operation of the movable body for production 4AK001, and a sound or a lamp is lit. Alternatively, the operation of the production movable body 4AK001 may be suggested by a combination thereof.

  The determination ratio shown in FIG. 8-6 (D) is an example, and it suffices that the operation mode of the effectable movable body 4AK001 can be suggested by the display mode of the corresponding display. For example, in the case of the first mode, the first display mode is determined. Only one of the control of facilitating the control and the control of facilitating the determination of the second display mode in the case of the second mode may be executed. Further, the type of display mode of the correspondence display (moving body motion suggestion) is an example, and there may be three or more types. For example, a display mode of the correspondence display corresponding to the third mode may be provided. Further, the display mode of the correspondence display may be uniquely determined according to the operation mode of the effectable movable body 4AK001.

  Further, as a display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body motion suggestion, a third display mode in which the first display mode is changed to the second display mode (a snowman icon melts into a sun icon), and a second display mode There may be provided a fourth display mode that changes from the first display mode to the first display mode (a sun icon becomes cloudy and becomes a snow icon) and the like. In this case, it suffices to be able to suggest the notice of the movable body to be executed in the final display mode. Further, there may be a display mode intermediate between the first display mode and the second display mode. For example, a first intermediate display mode (for example, a melting snowman icon) indicating that the first display mode is likely to change to the second display mode, or a second intermediate display mode that is likely to change from the second display mode to the first display mode. A second intermediate display mode shown (for example, a cloudy sun icon or the like) may be provided. When the first intermediate display mode is set when the movable body motion suggestion is started, the second display mode is more easily changed than when the movable body motion suggestion is started, and the movable body motion suggestion is started. In the case of the second intermediate display mode, it may be easier to change to the first display mode than in the case of the second display mode. In addition, the final display mode is in the order of the first display mode> the first intermediate display mode> the second intermediate display mode> the second display mode, the movable body notice of the first mode is easily executed, and the second display mode> The second intermediate display mode> the first intermediate display mode> the first display mode in that order, the movable body notice of the first mode may be easily executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the movable body advance notice is executed, the display mode of the corresponding display (movable body motion suggestion) is determined, but it is possible to respond regardless of whether or not the movable body advance notice is executed. The display mode of the display (movable body motion suggestion) may be determined. By doing this, when the movable body advance notice is not displayed even though the movable body motion suggestion display is displayed, or when the normal correspondence display is displayed but the movable body advance notice is executed There will be a variety of productions. In this case, for example, each effect mode may be determined according to the pre-reading determination result. By associating the determination rate of the motion pattern of the movable body notification based on the pre-reading determination result with the determination rate of the display mode of the corresponding display, the operation pattern of the movable body notification can be suggested by the display mode of the corresponding display.

  After the display mode of the corresponding display (moving body motion suggestion) is determined, the determination results in steps 4AKS007 and AKS008 are stored (step 4AKS009). By referring to the determination result stored here in the variable display effect processing in step S172, the effect operation of the movable body advance notice or the movable body motion suggestion is realized.

  After step 4AKS006 or step 4AKS009, control to display the hold display (active display when the number of hold is 0) corresponding to the present start winning is executed on the image display device 5 (step 4AKS010), and the prefetch advance notice setting process is ended. To do.

(Modification of the characteristic part 4AK)
The present characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristic features may be added. Further, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Further, this feature part and another feature part may be appropriately combined.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 4AK, it is suggested that the production movable body 4AK001 operates (movable body advance notice is executed) by changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display (specific display). Although the movable body motion suggestion is executed, the movable body motion suggestion may be executed by changing the background image in the image display device 5. For example, in this case, in step 4AKS008 of FIG. 8-5, the background image of the movable body motion suggestion may be determined. In this case, for example, the background image is determined at the determination rate shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-7, in this modified example, as the background image of the movable body motion suggestion, the first background (changed from cloudy background to snow background), the second background (changed from cloudy background to clear background), and 3 backgrounds (no change from cloudy backgrounds) are provided. With the background image at the time of normal time (when no notice is given or at the time of non-execution of movable body motion suggestion) as a cloudy background, the background image between the first background and the second background changes from the background at the normal time to the background image suggesting movable body motion, The background may not change in the third background. The display mode of the corresponding display of the movable body motion suggestion may be four or more or two.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7, in this modified example, when the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001 is the first mode, it is easy to determine the first background as the background image, and the operation of the production movable body 4AK001. When the mode is the second mode, it is easy to determine the second background as the background image, and when the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001 is the third mode, it is easy to determine the background image as the third background. Has become. Similar to the above-described embodiment, the background image of the movable body motion suggestion corresponding to the motion mode of the effectable movable body 4AK001 is easily determined.

  When the notice of the movable body is executed, the background image on the image display device 5 is changed to the background image determined here before the notice of the movable body is executed (for example, at the start of operation or several seconds before). Has become. Therefore, the changed background image can suggest the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001. Note that the movable body motion suggestion based on the background image may be executed only when the movable body advance notice is executed in the variable display of the advance notice target. Then, when the movable body advance notice is executed before the variable display of the advance notice target is executed, the movable body operation suggestion by the hold display may be executed. By doing so, the subject of the notice of the movable body can be easily understood. Further, when the variable display of the notice target is in the hold display, the background image may be changed at the timing of shifting the hold display.

  As the movable body motion suggestion, both the movable body motion suggestion by the background image and the movable body motion suggestion by the corresponding display may be executed. In this case, the movable body motion suggestion in which the display mode of the corresponding display changes may be executed after the movable body motion suggestion by the background image is executed. By doing so, it can be suggested that the corresponding display changes as the background image changes. In this case, the combination of the background image and the display mode of the corresponding display may indicate which movable body notice is to be executed. Further, the movable body motion suggestion in which the background image changes may be executed after the movable body motion suggestion by the corresponding display is executed. In this case, the display mode of the corresponding display may be changed according to the changed background image. For example, if the background image changes to a sunny background image after the moving body motion suggestion that displays the snowman icon is executed, the snowman icon will melt and change to the sun icon, or make it easier to change. May be.

  The determination rate shown in FIG. 8-7 is an example, and may be any determination rate capable of suggesting the operation mode of the production movable body 4AK001 from the background image.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, after determining whether or not to execute the movable body advance notice, the effect mode of the movable body motion suggestion is determined, but the method of determining the movable body motion suggestion is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to provide a plurality of effect patterns in which the notice of the movable body and the suggestion of the movable body action are provided, and determine the effect pattern to determine the effect form of the notice of the movable body and the suggestion of the movable body operation. Such an effect pattern may be determined by a variation pattern.

  The production movable body 4AK001 of the above-described embodiment was capable of executing the projecting operation and the advancing operation, and was capable of vibrating operation and temperature change. The operation mode of the effectable movable body 4AK001 is not limited to this, and other operations may be possible. For example, the rotation operation, the lighting of the lamp, and the change of the color may be performed. Further, the installation position, shape, operation mode, and type of operation mode of the effect movable body may be arbitrary, as long as the operation can be suggested by the display mode of the corresponding display or the background image. That is, it is sufficient that the effectable movable body can perform an operation corresponding to the display mode of the corresponding display and the background image. The production movable body may be one that does not vibrate or change in temperature.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 4AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic unit 4AK is
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable object for production (for example, movable body for production 4AK001L, which can be changed to a plurality of types of modes including the first mode (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R),
Holding storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing information regarding variable display as holding storage;
Corresponding to the pending storage, a pending display means (for example, in the image display device 5) capable of displaying pending display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun). And a production control CPU 120) for displaying a hold display,
The production movable body,
When the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
When the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
The case where the hold display is displayed in the second display mode is easier to change to the second mode than the case where the hold display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 ( D)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) Other gaming machines related to the characteristic part 4AK
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A movable object for production (for example, movable body for production 4AK001L, which can be changed to a plurality of types of modes including the first mode (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-4 (E)). 4AK001R),
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for displaying an active display on the image display device 5),
The specific display means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun),
The production movable body,
When the specific display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
The case where the specific display is displayed in the second display mode is easier to change to the second mode than the case where the specific display is displayed in the first display mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 ( D)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
In the case where the holding display (specific display) is displayed in the first display mode, the effect movable body is more displayed in the first display mode than when the hold display (specific display) is displayed in the second display mode. You may make it easy to change to the said 1st aspect (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The hold display means (specific display means) is capable of displaying the hold display (specific display) so that the operation of the hold display (specific display) and the operation of the effecting movable body are made to correspond to each other. Good.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
You may do it.
The production movable body,
It is provided so that players can touch it,
The temperature may be changed in a plurality of stages, and the temperature may be changed to a higher temperature in the second mode than in the first mode (for example, 8-6 (B)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The production movable body may be changed in different periods depending on whether it changes to the first mode or the second mode.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An operation control unit (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) for controlling the operation of the effect movable body is provided,
The operation control means, during the period from when the operation of the effect movable body is suggested by the hold display (specific display) until the operation of the effect movable body is executed, the operation of the effect movable body. Other motions other than the above may be restricted (for example, if a pre-reading notice is already being executed in step 4AKS002 and a later judgment is made, no new pre-reading notice or moving body motion suggestion is executed).
According to such a configuration, the production can be smoothly advanced.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step 120AKSA12) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means capable of controlling to a change permission state in which the setting means is allowed to change with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 112 which executes processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01 and 120AKSA02). When,
A movable member that can be operated according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014, a movable object for production 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.),
At least movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member (for example, step AKS012 power-on command processing for executing the command processing, etc.)),
The movable control unit may perform control to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS007) in the change permission state.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
A setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change process of step 120AKSA12) capable of setting any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means capable of controlling to a change permission state in which the setting means is allowed to change with the start of power supply (for example, CPU 112 which executes processing of steps 112IWS011 to 112IWS013, 112IWS015 to 112IWS017 and steps 120AKSA01 and 120AKSA02). When,
A movable member that can be operated according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member that is operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member that is operated by the operation motor AK014, a movable object for production 4AK001L, 4AK001R, etc.),
At least, a movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the original position (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012),
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
In the change permission state, the control for executing the return operation may not be performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
According to such a configuration, since the returning operation for returning the movable member to the original position is not executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic part 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area by a predetermined ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window is provided in the gaming machine frame 112IW003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface. The glass door frame 112IW003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game hall into the lock and unlocking it, and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 while being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) described later in the setting change state, are set. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switching switch 112IW052, is housed in the substrate case 112IW201 together with the main substrate 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switching switch 112IW052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

  Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not possible when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. It is possible, and the operation can be performed by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in a game arcade, so that only a store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic portion 112IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

  In addition, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged on the board case 112IW201. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left portion of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front surface of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 in the characteristic part 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the game island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present characteristic part 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting switch 112IW052 at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the back side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is made of a transparent plate-shaped synthetic resin material. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 9-2, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right side of the board case 112IW201 from the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. As a result, the right side of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 become inoperable by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. When separated, the covering state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes an operable state.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present characteristic portion 112IW, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the operation of the operation portion including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is restricted by the security cover 112IW500A. While the state is maintained, in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A described above is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is allowed. It becomes a state.

  Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless the clerk of the game hall or the like opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

  However, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed in a state where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on the gaming island (not shown) of the gaming hall, for example, with another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted between the gaming device such as a card unit or the like, a spacer member and the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is inserted. Since there is a possibility that a fraudulent act such as changing the setting value by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting switch 112IW052 is performed, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch by the security cover 112IW500A in the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Restricted state in which operation of the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

  Further, even when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back surface of the substrate case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the substrate is passed through the transparent security cover 112IW500A. Since it is possible to see through the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201, it is possible to easily confirm the mounting surface on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted on the main board 11 and the situation such as a seal.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, on the main substrate 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining Numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted in the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-4 and 9-5, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are stored is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), misalignment shown in FIG. 9-6 It includes a variation pattern determination table, a public figure display result determination table (not shown), a public figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the setting value, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is changed. . The set value is made up of three stages of 1 to 3, with 1 being the lowest payout rate, and the higher the value being in the order of 1, 2 and 3, the higher the payout rate. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3, the advantage gradually increases.

(Display result judgment table)
9-4 (A) to 9 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second). That is, that is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), when the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1 is used, if the variable special symbol designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is a variable display target. If the set values are “2” and “3”, the jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 in the non-probable variation, 1/32 in the probable variation). Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/320 for non-probability change, 1/32 for probability change). To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1". You win the jackpot with a higher probability (1/300 when uncertain change, 1/30 when uncertain change) than in some cases. Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is targeted for variable display, the big prize is won with the same probability as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display (1/300 during non-probability change, 1/30 during probability change) To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special map designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280 in non-probability change, 1/28 in probability change) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variation special map designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as when the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, the second special symbol Even when is targeted for variable display, the first special symbol is the target of variable display, with the same probability (1/280 when non-probable variation, 1/28 when probable variation) To do.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C). When the hit determination value is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the jackpot win is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 9-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, it means to decide whether to control the big hit game state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design.

  Further, for example, the same probability change is applied when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability change state ends based on the fact that the change display is performed a predetermined number of times (the probability change end count) after being controlled to the probability change state (high probability state). If it is the number of times of termination, the probability variation continuation rate (rate of condominium) may be configured to increase in the order of set value “1” <set value “2” <set value “3”.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, three set values of 1 to 3 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 9-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used when the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, different tables may be provided so that the proportion of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot type A to jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to when deciding on either.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), the determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value, but for simplification of description, assignment is made. The ratio of the determined judgment values is shown. In other words, the ratio of which of the big hit type A to the big hit type C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned with the determination value corresponding to the random number. For simplification, the percentage of the assigned decision value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is “1”, the percentage determined as the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is “2”, The determination value is assigned such that when the jackpot type B is highly determined and the setting value is “3”, the jackpot type A is highly determined.

  Here, the jackpot type in the present feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 9-5 (B). In the present feature portion 112IW, a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the jackpot game are determined for each jackpot type. Has been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening preprocessing of step S114 is performed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12, the big hit game state is started. It is a period during which the fanfare production as the production operation to be notified is executed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period during which the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and on the effect control board 12 side, after the round in which the special winning opening is opened is completed, Is a period in which an interval effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round.

  The ending period is, for example, a period in which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and the ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period of time.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the big hit type A, the longest in the big hit type B, and the longest in the big hit type C. It is set to be short.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of determination as the jackpot type C is high, and thus the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the percentage of determination as the big hit type A is high, and therefore the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively long. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the jackpot is high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed and Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The present feature section 112IW is configured to be able to execute a big hit medium suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big hit game, but this big hit medium suggestion effect is performed in the fanfare period, interval period and ending. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the fun of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be increased. In addition, by directing the player's interest to the suggestion production during the big hit, it is possible to make the duration of each period less noticeable.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is not easily noticed by the players is commonly executed.

  Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the percentage of which big hit type is determined is different for each set value. When the winning probability (ball-out rate) is high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set to be longer, that is, the progress of the game is delayed, but the setting is not limited to this. The fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, any one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which a relatively long period is set are selected in the descending order of the big hit type A <B <C. Therefore, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the present characteristic portion 112IW, in any of the big hit type A to the big hit type C, the time saving control and the probability variation control which are executed after the end of the big hit game state are a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present characteristic part 112IW). The figure game ends, or the big hit game state is entered before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. For example, the number of time saving control and probability variation control may be different for each big hit type. May be, in the case of a particular big hit type, high-precision control and time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state, continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state It may be done. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, the jackpot gaming state is a so-called condominium state that occurs continuously without going through the normal state. In the present characteristic part 112IW, the jackpot rate is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variation continues for each set value. The rates (rates of consecutive holidays) may be different.

  In addition, in the feature section 112IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the big hit type A to the big hit type C (for example, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control, etc.), and the fanfare period and interval. It is configured so that the average period of the period and the ending period are different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence / absence of time saving control and probability variation control, the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different You may do it. In this case, the effects during the round may be different for each jackpot type, or may be the same regardless of the jackpot type.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is determined from the jackpot type A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C at different rates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value being set, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot types B, and the jackpot types C that cannot be determined or There may be more than one. In other words, if the jackpot type determination rate differs according to the set value, either one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific jackpot type is 100%. Included in deciding on a percentage.

  Further, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the type of jackpot is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are not limited to the type of jackpot. The period may be different. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be uniformly determined depending on which of the set values is "1" to "3". Further, for example, depending on which one of the set values “1” to “3” is set, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. You may.

  In this way, in the characteristic part 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

  In addition, in the feature part 112IW, the big hit type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit type is a special figure display result. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random number value for determination.

  Further, in the characteristic part 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the big hit probability increases, and the big hit type C as the big hit type is easily determined). Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game itself does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the one, the game property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. While controlling the gaming state after the end of the big hit game to a probable state based on passing a predetermined count switch, the percentage of game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game is different depending on the big hit type If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3 (so-called V-probability type), the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is in a high base (during time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state based on passing a predetermined count switch provided special variable winning ball device 7 (the so-called one two-kind mixed type). Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same in playability as 1 to 3, the jackpot probability is higher than in the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the jackpot is being played. A setting may be provided in which the number of award balls that can be acquired is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time it is played, and when the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (game ball It may be used as a switch for controlling the gaming state to a positive variation state or a big hit gaming state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern determination table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is previously determined that the variation display result is “big hit” and a variation display result may be “missed”. A loss variation pattern determination table used when predetermined is prepared in advance.

(Loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram of a loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic part 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from the time when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and other periods ( In the following, it is also referred to as a non-special period) and different loss variation pattern determination tables are used.

  Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first lost variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), and in the non-special period, it is shown in FIG. 9-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second lost variation pattern determination table. In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at the time of turning on the power until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, the period until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) may be set as the special period regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a real time clock or the like may be used to set a special period in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be a special period.

In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B), the normal reach loss and the super reach loss occur in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach or the super reach differs depending on the set value, and thus the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach or the super reach is executed.

  Further, the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), and further has a set value. The determination values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, in the special period, it is easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of executing the normal reach than in the non-special period (that is, it is easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and thus the motivation for playing the game in the special period. Can be given to enhance the fun of the game.

  Note that, for example, fluctuation patterns with super reach (or specific fluctuation patterns among them) are determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in set values (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may do it. By doing this, the execution rate differs only for a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) according to the setting value, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency with which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Note that conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be different depending on the set value.

  Further, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value, except for non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratios (that is, the balance of normal reach loss: super reach loss) are different. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (A), the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). In the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6 (B), the normal reach loss is set in the order of set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, setting suggestive effects can be executed at different rates according to the set values. This is because the execution rates of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different according to the set values. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different according to the set value.

  In the feature unit 112IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 regardless of which of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-6A and 9B is used. Then, the variable display of the effect design is performed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 to perform variable display of effect symbols. Note that the special background image may be displayed only during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  Not limited to the example of the characteristic part 112IW, for example, a special variation pattern suggesting a setting value (for example, a variation pattern in which the variation display of the effect design is different from the normal one, and the setting value is 1 or 2) May be selected) to allow the special variation pattern to be selected only in the special period. With such a structure as well, it is possible to provide a motivation to play a game during a special period, and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Non-reach lost variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram of a non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table. In this feature part 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach-miss variation patterns having different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach-loss, the non-reach-loss variation A to C is further determined. Is configured. Not limited to such a configuration, for example, in the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-6, non-reach loss A to C is included, and any of non-reach loss A to C, normal reach loss, and super reach loss is detected. It may be configured to determine whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 9-7, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach-loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high and the setting value is "2". If the setting value is “3”, the rate determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the feature part 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, and therefore the variation time at non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, and therefore the variation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average variation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In the characteristic part 112IW, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the set value "1" <"2" <"3", but at the same time, the set value is "1". It is also configured such that the average variation time becomes longer in the order of “<“ 2 ”<“ 3 ”. With such a configuration, when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is set high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling probability becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  In the feature part 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the proportion of the non-reach loses A to C having different variation times according to the set value. It is also possible to provide a plurality of types of variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. In addition, when a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss or super reach loss) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time for the fluctuation display of the effect symbol or the high-speed variation display is made different so that the effect of the production etc. It is desirable that there be no difference in how they look.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average variation time is configured to be different depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final effect design (final The period in which the stop pattern) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the variation time is set for each of the non-reach loses A to C, and the proportion of which of the non-reach loses A to C is determined is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (ball payout rate) is set high, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration and is set for each set value. The fixed time may be set, and the variation time may be longer when the winning probability (ball output rate) of the big hit is higher.

  The characteristic part 112IW is provided with a variation pattern for shortening which has a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time of 1.5 seconds) is provided that is shorter than the non-reach loss A (variation time of 9 seconds). The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more. In such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories has reached the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is canceled and variable display is efficiently performed (that is, the game is efficiently advanced). ) Is intended. Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is a predetermined number or more. Therefore, in the feature unit 112IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. Note that, regardless of the configuration of the present characteristic unit 112IW, the fluctuation time pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or larger than the predetermined number may be changed according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning opening (big winning opening, second winning opening, first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, general winning opening) It is possible to perform totaling and to calculate various winning information such as continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base based on the totaling.

  Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a 4-digit display unit. The display portion of each digit is made up of 7 segments, each of which is composed of 7 segments that draw the shape of "8", and dots arranged at the lower right side of the 7 segments.

  The display contents are displayed on the first digit display part and the second digit display part, and the numerical values are displayed in percentage on the third digit display part and the fourth digit display part. In Display No. 1, the short-term ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 2, the short-term ratio is displayed. In Display No. 3, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed, and in Display No. 4, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed. In addition, in display No. 5, the base (base 1) calculated based on the last 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No 6, the base (base 2) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. To be done.

  The short term here means a period in which the number of prize balls paid out (the number of acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is started, or the total period after the calculation of the continuous ratio and the combination ratio is once reset.

  In the above example, the ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated independently of the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the continuous ratio may be a ratio of the total number of prize balls, which is occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening during the big hit game state. In addition, the winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls due to winning the second starting prize hole in the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning the large prize hole in the jackpot gaming state to the total number of prize balls. Good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first digit display and the second-digit display, and when the short-term ratio of display No2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. In addition, when the short-term ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit, and the short-term ratio of display No. 2 is displayed. When is displayed, the short-term combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (displayed as a percentage) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  When the total cumulative ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and when the total cumulative ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative total ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit, and the total cumulative total ratio of display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative combination ratio is displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display section and the fourth digit display section.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the display unit of the first digit and the display unit of the second digit, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, one digit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the eye display and the second digit display. When the base 1 of display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  Further, the display of these short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning ratio, base 1 and base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, regarding the set value set at that time. It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term consecutive ratio, short-term winning ratio, total cumulative consecutive ratio, total cumulative winning percentage, base 1, and base 2.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a mode in which the continuous ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be capable of displaying only one numerical value or only two numerical values out of these continuous ratio, winning ratio, and base.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 112IW, an example is shown in which the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the consecutive ratio, the winning combination, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the number of awarded prize balls may be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

(Setting change process)
Next, the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 112IW will be described. 9-8 to 9-10 are flowcharts showing the game control main processing in the characteristic unit 112IW. In this characteristic part 112IW, the processing of steps 112IWS001 and S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 and S2 shown in FIG.

  When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 112IWS003). In this case, the effect control means start waiting timer is set to a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the game machine until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and confirms whether the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control means start waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004 and the processes of steps 112IWS004 to S005 are repeatedly executed. If the value of the production control means start waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 112IWS006.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS003 to S005, the process of step 112IWS006 and thereafter is executed after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting value change and confirmation, the RAM initialization and restoration processing, etc. are executed. To be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization designation command, and a command for restoration, which will be described later, are transmitted before the production control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is missed. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is a value at the time of factory shipment (for example, a value other than “0” or a possible set value) (step 112IWS006). If the settings at the time of factory shipment remain the same (step 112IWS006; Yes), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  If it is not the factory default setting (step 112IWS006; No), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is saved (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the data check of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same process as step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112IWS008). In step 112IWS008, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time when the power supply is stopped, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, the data in the RAM 102 is determined to be normal. When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the setting change flag indicating that the setting value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112IWS009; Yes), that is, if the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to power failure or the like during the change of the set value, the process proceeds to step 112IWS010.

  In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 controls to send a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 112IW029 to display a display indicating that a RAM error has occurred (for example, a display of "E").

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (the door (frame 112IW003 for gaming machine is open)) (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is ON, the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA01). When the RAM clear flag is on, the process related to the setting change is executed, and then the RAM clear process for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 102 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step 120AKSA03.

  On the other hand, if the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is OFF (the door is closed) (N in step 112IWS011), the setting key 112IW051 is OFF (N in step 112IWS012), the clear switch is pressed. If the output signal of is off (N in step 112IWS013), the process does not move to step 120AKSA01 but moves to loop processing. Before entering the loop processing, control for transmitting a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (processing of step 112IWS010) may be executed.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S013, in the characteristic unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in step 112IWS007, S008), the setting for factory shipment is still left (step 112IWS006 Y), if an electric power interruption or the like occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. Under the condition, the setting value after step 120AKSA03 can be changed, and then the RAM is cleared. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the RAM clear flag (step 120AKSA02).

  After the processing of step 120AKSA02 or if the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWS017).

  If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03). Here, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on, a process for confirming the setting (setting confirmation process) or a process for changing the setting (setting change) depending on the state of the RAM clear flag (that is, the clear switch on / off). Process). The error process may be executed when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned off during the setting change or the setting confirmation.

  When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA03; Yes), a setting change start command indicating to start the setting change process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA04). If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA03; No), a setting confirmation start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA05).

  On the production control board 12 side, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, A predetermined sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a decorative light emitting body such as a decorative LED is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the set value is the value at the time of factory shipment (for example, “0” or the like) (step 120AKSA06). If it is the set value at the time of factory shipment (step 120AKSA06; Yes), the set value is set to "1" (step 120AKSA07). In step 120AKSA07, the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated to "1".

  In step 120AKSA07, when the set value is the value at the time of factory shipment, the set value is set to "1" as the initial value, but another set value may be set as the initial value. Also, if there is a RAM error such as when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 or when the backup data is not normal (for example, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed), the setting value is set to the initial value “1”. You may do it. In this case, when the process of step 112IWS010 is executed (step 112IWS006; Yes, step 112IWS007; No, or step 112IWS008; No), the RAM abnormality flag is set, and in step 120AKSA06, the RAM abnormality flag is set. It may be determined whether or not is ON.

  When the setting value is not the factory setting value (step 120AKSA06; No), after executing the processing of step 120AKSA07, the CPU 103 displays the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 120AKSA08). ).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA09; Yes), the setting change flag is set (step 120AKSA10).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is ON (step 120AKSA11). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is on (step 120AKSA11; Yes), the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is updated (step 112AKSA12). The set value is updated each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated (pressed). For example, when the set value is "1", it is updated to "2", when the set value is "2", it is updated to "3", and when the set value is "3", it is updated to "1". Just update it. A specific set value may be designated by operating the setting changeover switch 112IW052.

  If the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA09; No), it means that the setting has been confirmed, and therefore the processing for changing the setting is not executed. In this case, or when the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is not on (step 120AKSA11; No), after updating the processing of step 112AKSA12, it is determined whether the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off. (Step 120AKSA13).

  When the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 remains ON (step 120AKSA13; No), the process returns to step 120AKSA08 to continue the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. When the set value is updated in step 112AKS012, the updated set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 by executing the process of step 120AKSA08 again.

  When the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is off (step 120SA13; Yes), it is determined whether the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA14; Yes), the setting change flag is reset (step 120AKSA15), and a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA16). ).

  When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA14; No), a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 120AKSA17).

  After that, the display of the set value on the display monitor 112IW029 is erased (step 120AKSA18), and the set value command indicating the set value is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). The setting value command may be transmitted only when the setting value is updated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA19). When the RAM clear flag is on (step 120AKSA19; Yes), the RAM clear processing is executed (step 120AKSA20). In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clearing process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the area other than the area for storing performance display information such as the serial ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, and the area for storing the set value in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the serial ratio and Information for performance display such as winning ratio, base, etc., and setting value information are not cleared and retained.

  After that, the CPU 103 transmits the effect control command instructing the initialization to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as step S9 (step 112IWS033).

  When the RAM clear flag is off (step 120AKSA19; No), the CPU 103 performs the restoration process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of power supply stop by the same process as step S6. To do. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits the production control command instructing the recovery from the power interruption to the production control board 12 by the same processing as step S7 (step 112IWS023).

  After the process of step 112IWS033 or step 112IWS023, the process proceeds to step 112IWS034. The processing in steps 112IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing in steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Note that the set value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 120AKSA08. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5.

  In addition, during the execution of the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed in the normal game (for example, all segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Good. In this way, by using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B to notify, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. The special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may have different modes in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

  In addition, if the power is turned off during the execution of the setting change process, the setting change process is executed again and the updated setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM), so that the setting change is not completed. , It may be an error. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, the setting change flag (which is not erased even if the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM that stores the setting value, and the setting change is completed at the end of the setting change process. When the flag is turned off and the process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed and the setting change flag is on, an error occurs. As described above, in a situation in which the setting change process does not normally proceed on the way, the clerk at the game hall may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though the setting change has not been completed. In such a case, an error is generated if the setting change is not completed, so that the setting change can be surely completed.

  Further, in step 120AKSA08, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not normally performed, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5, and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are different from those in the normal game. (For example, all segments of the 7-segment LED may be turned off, and if all lights are on during the setting confirmation process and the setting change process, all the segments may be blinked).

  FIG. 9-11 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic unit 112IW, as shown in FIG. 9-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is turned on when the power is turned on (and the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is turned on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 120AKSA08 to 120AKSA013 etc.) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 120AKSA08, 120AKSA013 etc.) is executed. If the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process (20 etc. in step 120AKSA05) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process (step 112 IWS024) is executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the game control main processing shown in FIGS. 9-8 to 9-10, branching according to the states of the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch (RAM clear flag) while sharing some of the processing. Then, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, the initialization process, or the restoration process is executed, but each of them may be modularized and executed as an individual process.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9-12 (A) and 9-12 (B), when power is turned off (power is cut off) by an operation of a store clerk or the like in a game arcade, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. In addition, when the special winning opening such as during a big hit game is being opened at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like in the game arcade turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on condition that the setting value is set, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in this way, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the store clerk at the game hall. The numerical value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is sequentially updated (for example, updated every time the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is operated, such as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 → ...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (E), the CPU 103 sets the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the RAM 102 based on the setting key 112IW051 being turned off by the operation of the store clerk or the like in the game arcade. Stored in the backup area of (update storage). At this time, the CPU 103, on the display monitor 112IW029, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the short-term ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, for the set value set at that time. Display base 1 and base 2. RAM
If the pending storage is stored in the backup area 102, the pending storage is cleared. Further, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 9-12 (A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the special winning opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 finishes the setting change process and is in a state in which the game can be played, that is, the variation display result, the big hit type, the variation pattern determination lottery, the prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9-12 (F), the CPU 103 displays “EEEE” on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 that stores the set value. It is possible to

  In the setting change process in the characteristic unit 112IW, an example is shown in which the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as the initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change process, the setting value that is most unfavorable to the player (“1” in the case of this characteristic portion 112IW) or the most advantageous to the player. You may make it display a setting value ("3" in case of this characteristic part 112IW).

(Operation of the effect control board 12 in the game machine whose setting can be changed)
FIG. 10-1 is a flowchart showing another example of the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. This effect control main process may be executed in place of the effect control main process in the above embodiment. In the effect control main processing of the present embodiment, after the effect control CPU 120 executes the same initialization processing (step AKS011) as in the above-described embodiment, unlike the above-described embodiment, the power-on command processing (step Perform AKS012). After the power-on command processing is executed, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step AKS013), and if it is turned off (step AKS013; No), as in the above embodiment. The process of step AKS013 is repeatedly executed and stands by. On the other hand, when the timer interrupt flag is on (step AKS013; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state (step AKS014), command analysis processing (step AKS015), and effect control process processing. (Step AKS016) and the random number updating process (step AKS017) are sequentially executed.

  FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step AKS012 as power-on command processing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 acquires the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 with the start of power supply as a received command, and determines the content thereof. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9000H which is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021). When the received command is not the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; No), it is determined whether the received command is the command 9200H which is the power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022). When the command is not the power failure recovery stop command (step AKS022; No), it is determined whether the received command is the command 9100H which is the setting change start command (step AKS023). If it is not the setting change start command (step AKS023; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the command 9400H which becomes the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024). When the command is not the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; No), the process returns to step AKS021, and repeatedly executes steps AKS021 to AKS024 until the received command is obtained and stands by. In addition, when a predetermined error determination time has elapsed without being able to acquire the received command, it may be notified that an error has occurred in the received command.

  When it is determined in step AKS023 that the received command is the setting change start command (step AKS023; Yes), the game stop state start time process is executed (step AKS025). In the game stop state start time process, in response to the game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the progress of the effect control accompanying the progress of the game is stopped. In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS025, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, the command other than the setting change end command is set to invalidate the reception. do it. With this, for example, it is possible to restrict not to execute various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit. When the setting change start command is received, when the game is in the game stopped state corresponding to the setting changed state, various effects associated with the progress of the game that are executable when the game is not in the game stopped state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or limit.

  After the game stop state start time process is executed in step AKS025, control for starting setting change notification is performed (step AKS026). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting change notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting change notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting change notification sound. Then, control may be performed. After the control of the setting change notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting change is ended (step AKS027). In step AKS027, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 93XXH which is the setting change end command, it may be determined that the setting change is ended. When the setting change end command is not received and the setting change is not ended (step AKS027; No), step AKS027 is repeatedly executed and stands by.

  When it is determined in step AKS027 that the setting change has been completed (step AKS027; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step AKS028). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting change notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting change notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. After the control of the setting change notification is completed in this way, the game stop state end time processing is executed (step AKS029). In the game stop state end processing, it is only necessary to set the command reception from the main board 11, which has been invalidated, to be valid. Thus, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit can be executed.

  After that, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step AKS030). For example, the effect control CPU 120 initializes the effect display device 5 in the initialization notification period until the predetermined initialization notification time elapses based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the initialization notification. The control may be performed such that the notification screen is displayed and the initialization notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Even if it is determined in step AKS021 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step AKS021; Yes), the initialization notification can be executed by proceeding to step AKS030. In this way, it is possible to notify that the storage content of the RAM 102 has been initialized (cleared) in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 with the start of power supply by turning on the power is detected.

  When it is determined in step AKS024 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step AKS024; Yes), the game stop state start time process is executed (step AKS031). In the game stop state start time process executed in step AKS031, for example, among the effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, the command other than the setting confirmation end command is set to invalidate the reception. do it. With this, for example, it is possible to restrict not to execute various effects associated with the progress of the game, such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit. When the setting confirmation start command is received, when the game is in the game stopped state corresponding to the setting confirmation state, various effects associated with the progress of the game that are executable when the game is not in the game stopped state are not executed. There is a limit as a range or limit.

  After the game stop state start time process is executed in step AKS031, control for starting the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS032). For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display the setting confirmation notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance corresponding to the setting confirmation notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the setting confirmation notification sound. Then, control may be performed. After the control of the setting confirmation notification is started in this way, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is ended (step AKS033). In step AKS033, when the received command from the main board 11 is the command 9401H which is the setting confirmation end command, it may be determined to end the setting confirmation. When the setting confirmation end command is not received and the setting confirmation is not ended (step AKS033; No), step AKS033 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  When it is determined in step AKS033 that the setting confirmation is to be ended (step AKS033; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step AKS034). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may perform control such that the display of the setting confirmation notification screen on the effect display device 5 is ended and the output of the setting confirmation notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is ended. Thus, after the control of the setting confirmation notification is finished, the game stop state end processing is executed (step AKS035). Thus, for example, the restriction may be released so that various effects accompanying the progress of the game such as variable display of effect symbols and effect display during a big hit can be executed.

  After that, control for executing the power failure recovery notification may be performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect display device 5 to display a power failure recovery notification screen based on the control data prepared in advance in response to the power failure recovery notification, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output the power failure recovery notification sound. Alternatively, control may be performed. Even when it is determined in step AKS022 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step AKS022; Yes), the power failure recovery notification may be executed. In these cases, if it is possible to notify that the contents stored in the RAM 102 have been restored to the contents at the time of the power failure in response to the case where the operation of pressing the clear switch AK001 is not detected with the start of the power supply when the power is turned on. Good.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
On the effect control board 12 of the characteristic part 72AK, operation motors AK011 to AK014 for driving a movable member that is a movable accessory (movable effect device) and origin sensors AK021 to AK024 for detecting the origin position of the movable member. It is connected. The operation motors AK011 to AK014 may be motors or electromagnetic solenoids. The origin sensors AK021 to AK024 may be configured by using a contact sensor such as a micro switch or a non-contact sensor such as a photo sensor or a capacitance sensor.

  FIG. 10C illustrates an example of execution of power-on operation by the movable member driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The movable members driven by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 include a first movable member that serves as a first movable rendering device and a second movable member that serves as a second movable rendering device. The first movable member stops at the lower left position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (withdrawal position). After the evacuation position, the operation effect is performed in which the object is raised diagonally upward to the right, stopped at the advancing position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returned to the evacuation position again. The first movable member includes a rotation mechanism, first to third split pieces, and a slide mechanism. First to third split pieces are provided at the tip of the rotating mechanism. The first to third split pieces form a predetermined figure at this time, with the origin position being the closed state in which they are united. The rotation mechanism of the first movable member is rotated by the operation motor AK011 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position in the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5. As a result, after the first movable member has advanced to the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, the operation motor AK012 causes the first to third split pieces to split into an open state. On the other hand, when the first movable member is at the origin position, the first to third split pieces cannot be opened. The slide mechanism of the first movable member slides the rotation mechanism of the first movable member and the first to third split pieces to the advanced position and then slides them laterally by the operation motor AK013. The slide mechanism of the first movable member uses the rotation mechanism and the first to third split pieces as the origin position when the first movable member is at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and sets the first movable member to the left side of the effect display device 5. It suffices if it can be slid between the position and the right position.

  The second movable member stops with the upper position of the effect display device 5 as the origin position (withdrawal position). The operation effect of descending from the retracted position, stopping at the advancing position overlapping the front side of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and then returning to the retracted position again is performed. The second movable member is lowered by the operation motor AK014 from the retracted position, which is the origin position, to the advanced position slightly above the central portion of the display screen of the effect display device 5, and raised from the advanced position to the retracted position. In this way, the second movable member performs a simple reciprocating motion up and down by the driving force of the motion motor AK014.

  The origin position of the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK021. The origin position of the first to third split pieces of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK022. The origin position of the slide mechanism of the first movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK023. The origin position of the second movable member is detected by the origin sensor AK024. The operation motor AK011 provides a driving force that enables the rotation mechanism of the first movable member to move between the original position and the advanced position. The operation motor AK012 provides a driving force that enables the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to move between the closed state and the open state at the origin position. The operation motor AK013 provides a driving force that enables the slide mechanism of the first movable member to move between the origin position and the left side position or the right side position of the effect display device 5. The operation motor AK014 provides a driving force that enables the second movable member to move between the original position and the advanced position.

  The power-on operation by the first movable member and the second movable member includes a long initial operation and a short initial operation. The long initial operation is an initial operation that performs the same operation as a normal effect operation during execution of effect accompanying the progress of the game. By executing the long initial operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not a problem occurs in the normal effect operation. The short initial operation is an operation that omits a part of the normal effect operation, and is a return operation that returns the first movable member and the second movable member to the original position.

  When the long initial operation is executed as the power-on operation, first, as shown by the solid arrow 72KM01, the rotation mechanism of the first movable member is moved to the origin position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. To the overlapping position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen in the effect display device 5 which is the advance position. Subsequently, as indicated by a broken arrow 72AKM02, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved by the driving force of the operation motor AK012 from the closed position at the origin position to the open position. After that, as indicated by a dashed arrow 72AKM03, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member are moved from the open state to the closed state (origin position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK012. Next, as indicated by solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06, the slide mechanism of the first movable member is moved from the origin position to the right movable position by the driving force of the operation motor AK013 and then moved to the left movable position. After that, return to the origin position. Then, as indicated by the solid arrow 72AKM07, the rotating mechanism of the first movable member is returned from the advanced position to the original position (retracted position) by the driving force of the operation motor AK011. Thereafter, as indicated by broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09, the second movable member is moved from the origin position (retracted position) to the advanced position by the driving force of the operation motor AK014, and then returned to the original position (retracted position).

  When the short initial operation is performed as the power-on operation, the operation may be performed by omitting a part of the long initial operation. For example, among the operations indicated by the arrows 72AKM01 to 72AKM09, control is performed to execute the operations indicated by broken-line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. In this case, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member cannot be moved from the closed state to the open state unless the rotation mechanism of the first movable member moves to the advanced position. Therefore, even in the short initial operation, the operations indicated by solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07 are required. Also, in the long initial operation, the first to third split pieces of the first movable member and the second movable member operate so that the movement amount becomes larger than the operation indicated by the broken line arrows 72AKM02, 72AKM03, 72AKM08, 72AKM09. May be done. In the short initial operation, the slide mechanism of the first movable member may be moved such that the movement amount becomes smaller than the operation indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM04 to 72AKM06.

  In the short initial operation, at least a part of the operation may be omitted or added depending on the detection result of the origin sensors AK021 to AK024. For example, when the origin sensor AK022 is off and the other origin sensors are on, as an operation of moving the first to third split pieces of the first movable member to the closed state which is the origin position, a dashed arrow 72AKM03 The operation motor AK012 is driven so as to move in the direction. Then, when the origin sensor AK022 is turned on, the driving of the operation motor AK012 may be stopped. After that, by moving the rotation mechanism of the first movable member so as to be smaller than the movement amount indicated by the solid arrows 72AKM01 and 72AKM07, the origin sensor AK021 is once turned off and then turned on. The motor AK021 is driven. Further, the operation motor AK024 may be driven so that the origin sensor AK024 is once turned off and then turned on by moving the second movable member as indicated by broken line arrows 72AKM08 and 72AKM09.

  FIG. 10-4 shows a control pattern used to drive the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014. The pattern data forming these control patterns may be stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12. In this embodiment, a short initial control pattern 72AKP01, a long initial control pattern 72AKP02, a production operation A control pattern 72AKP11, and a production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 are prepared in advance as control patterns for the movable member.

  The short initial control pattern 72AKP01 is a control pattern used to execute the short initial operation. The long initial control pattern AKP02 is a control pattern used to execute a long initial operation. The production operation A control pattern 72AKP11 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the first production executed with the progress of the game, such as reach production. The production operation B control pattern 72AKP12 is a control pattern used to execute the operation of the movable member included in the second production different from the first production executed along with the progress of the game, such as a preliminary production. . As the control pattern of the movable member, more control patterns may be prepared, or some control patterns may be prepared. The effect control CPU 120 may determine the drive contents of the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the pattern data read from the ROM 121, and control the operation of the movable member.

  FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic unit 72AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above-described embodiment (steps 72AKS001 to 72AKS004). When it is determined in step 72AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 72AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS005) in the same manner as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 72AKS006, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS007). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the short initial control pattern 72AKP01 from a predetermined area of the ROM 121, and controls the operation of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS007, it is possible to perform the control to execute the returning operation for returning the movable member to the original position when the setting is changed as the change permitted state. Even in the period after the step 72AKS008 and the subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS007 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control by step 72AKS007, it is determined whether or not the setting change is to be ended, as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS008). When the setting change is not completed (step 72AKS008; No), step 72AKS008 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS008 to end the setting change (step 72AKS008; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 72AKS009), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 72AKS010).

  After executing the game stop state ending process in step 72AKS010, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS011), and the process proceeds to step 72AKS014. In step 72AKS011, for example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the pattern data of the long initial control pattern 72AKP02 from the predetermined area of the ROM 121, and executes the operation control of the movable member by the operation motors AK011 to AK014 based on the read data. By executing the control in step 72AKS011, it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member after the setting change state as the change permission state is completed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS011, the long initial operation which is the initial operation is executed after the short initial operation which is the return operation when the setting is changed as the change permitted state. It is possible not to control. Even after the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS011 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 72AKS001; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS012), and then control for executing the long initial operation. Is performed (step 72AKS013). In step 72AKS013, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS012 is completed. By executing the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013, when the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled with the start of the power supply, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after proceeding to step 72AKS014, the control in step 72AKS013 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the short initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS011 and the control in step 72AKS013 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

  Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 72AKS014). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the long initial operation. When it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS012. .

  When it is determined in step 72AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 72AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 72AKS015) as in the above embodiment, and the setting confirmation is performed. Control for starting notification is performed (step 72AKS016). Then, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS017). By executing the control in step 72AKS017, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 72AKS018 and subsequent steps, the control in step 72AKS017 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control by the step 72AKS017, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended, as in the above embodiment (step 72AKS018). When the setting confirmation is not completed (step 72AKS018; No), step 72AKS018 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 72AKS018 to end the setting confirmation (step 72AKS018; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 72AKS019), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 72AKS020).

  After executing the game stop state end process in step 72AKS020, unlike the above embodiment, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 72AKS021), and the power-on command process is ended. By executing the control in step 72AKS021, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed after the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completed. Control can be performed. Further, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 72AKS021, in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value, the short initial operation as the return operation is followed by the long initial operation as the initial operation. It is possible not to control the execution of. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 72AKS002; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS022), and then control for executing the long initial operation. (Step 72AKS023), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 72AKS023, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 72AKS022 ends. By performing the control in steps 72AKS022 and 72AKS023, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 72AKS023 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by a common process using a common long initial control pattern 72AKP02. Alternatively, the control in step 72AKS021 and the control in step 72AKS023 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02.

(Explanation of a modification regarding the characteristic part 72AK)
FIG. 10-6 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed in the modification of the characteristic unit 72AK. In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 (step 72AKS001; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS010. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS031), the control for executing the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS032), the process proceeds to step 72AKS014, and the control for executing the initialization notification is performed. If it is determined in step 72AKS001 that the received command is a RAM clear notification command, the contents stored in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 have been initialized (cleared) with the start of power supply when the power is turned on. Correspondingly, the initialization notification is executed by executing the control in step 72AKS014. When this initialization notification is executed, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed, so that it is possible to perform the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation following the short initial operation that is the return operation. .. In addition, even after the game stop state end time process is executed in step 72AKS010, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is executed to end the setting change state as the change permitting state and then return to the short circuit. Following the initial operation, it is possible to perform control to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation. In this way, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001 and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS010, the common control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed. , It is possible to control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  In the power-on command processing in this modification, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery designation command in step 72AKS002 (step 72AKS002; Yes), the game stop state end processing is executed in step 72AKS020. After that, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 72AKS033), the control for executing the long initial operation is subsequently performed (step 72AKS034), and the power-on command processing is ended. When it is determined in step 72AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command, the stored contents in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 are restored to the stored contents at the time of power failure with the start of power supply by turning on the power. . When such a power failure recovery is executed, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed, so that the control to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation is performed after the short initial operation that is the recovery operation. it can. In addition, even after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, the control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is executed to confirm the setting value for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. After the state is completed, it is possible to perform control to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. In this way, when the received command is determined to be the power failure recovery notification command in step 72AKS002 and after the game stop state end process is executed in step 72AKS020, the common control in steps 72AKS033 and 72AKS034 is performed. , It is possible to control to execute the long initial operation following the short initial operation.

  The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed when the initialization notification is performed, or may be controlled to be executed even if the initialization notification is not performed. Further, the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be controlled to be executed in response to the power failure recovery notification, or may be controlled to be executed without the power failure recovery notification. Further, after the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed on the basis of the satisfaction of the return operation condition. After the control for executing the effect accompanying the progress of the game is started, the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed based on the establishment of the initial operation condition.

  The configuration of the movable member is not limited to the form including the first movable member and the second movable member, and at least a short initial operation that is a return operation and a long initial operation that is an initial operation can be executed. In the production accompanying the progress of the game, it is sufficient if it can be operated in a predetermined operation mode. The short initial operation and the long initial operation may be arbitrarily designated according to the configuration of the movable member.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, the control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step 72AKS007. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting change state permitting the change of the set value. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the movable member is returned to the origin position, so that the work for changing the set value is not obstructed by the movable member and the work for changing the set value is performed. It is possible to prevent the trouble. Therefore, the setting value can be set appropriately.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 72AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013 is performed to perform a short initial operation that is a return operation. Then, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. On the other hand, when the short initial operation is executed by the control in step 72AKS007, the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is completed. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting change state, execution of the setting change notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting change state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed in the setting confirmation state. In this way, when the setting change state as the change permission state is set, the long initial operation that is the initial operation by the movable member is not executed, and the setting value change work is not hindered. It is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  When it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, in step 72AKS011, control for executing the long initial operation is performed. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute only the long initial operation that is the initial operation. As a result, when it is possible to prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered, it is possible to prevent unnecessary movement of the movable member and reduce the control load for operating the movable member. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing in the modified example of the characteristic unit 72AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 72AKS001, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed to perform the return operation. Control is performed to execute a long initial operation that is an initial operation subsequent to the short initial operation. At this time, the control in step 72AKS014 is performed to perform the control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply when the power is turned on, so that the initialization notification is given when the initialization related to the control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. Even when it is determined in step 72AKS008 that the setting change is to be ended, the control in steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 is performed, so that the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are executed. Take control. This makes it possible to standardize the operation of the movable members and reduce the control load for operating the movable members when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic part 72AK, control for executing the short initial operation is performed in step AKS017. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, the movable member such as the first movable member or the second movable member is moved to the origin position when it is controlled to the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Control is performed to execute a return operation for returning to. Then, when it is determined in step 72AKS018 that the setting confirmation is to be ended, control is executed in step 72AKS021 to execute the long initial operation. In this way, after the setting confirmation state ends, control is performed to execute the long initial operation that is the initial operation. If the long initial operation that is the initial operation is executed in the setting confirmation state, execution of the setting confirmation notification may be hindered, and appropriate notification may not be performed. Therefore, the control for executing the long initial operation is performed after the setting confirmation state ends, and the control for executing the long initial operation is not performed in the setting confirmation state. Accordingly, in the case of preventing the trouble of changing the set value, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by preventing the long initial operation, which is the initial operation by the movable member, from being executed in the setting confirmation state. To do so. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 72AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 72AK, there is a game machine that can be changed to a plurality of settings having different advantages for a player, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the original position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-212154, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change conflicts with the operation of the movable member. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the trouble of changing the set value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change processing in step Sa13) that can set any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply is started;
A movable member operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, etc.),
At least movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation (for example, short initial operation) for returning the movable member to the origin position and control of initial operation (for example, long initial operation) by the movable member (for example, step AKS012 power-on command processing for executing the command processing, etc.)),
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation in the change permission state (for example, execution of step 72AKS007),
It may be a game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position is executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 72AK,
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled with the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS012 and 72AKS013).
In the change permitting state, the control for executing the initial operation subsequent to the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS008),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the initial operation by the movable member from being executed in the change permitted state, thereby preventing a trouble in the work of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute only the initial operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 72AKS011),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to prevent useless movements of the movable member and prevent troubles in changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 relating to the characteristic portion 72AK,
When the game machine is initialized along with the start of the power supply, the initialization notification means for executing the initialization notification (for example, the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 72AKS014). Etc.),
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 accompanying execution of step 72AKS014),
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 72AKS031 and 72AKS032 following steps 72AKS005 to 72AKS010).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 2 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by making the operation of the movable member common and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic portion 72AK,
A setting confirmation control unit (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting confirmation process of step AKS002) capable of controlling the setting confirmation state for confirming the setting value set by the setting unit is provided,
The movable control means,
In the setting confirmation state, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 72AKS017),
After the setting confirmation state ends, control to execute the initial operation is performed (for example, execution of step 72AKS021),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 72AK.
With such a configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the set value by not performing the initial operation by the movable member in the setting confirmation state, and it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 73AK)
FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on command processing executed by the effect control CPU 120, regarding the characteristic unit 73AK of the present embodiment. This power-on command processing may be executed in step AKS012 of the effect control main processing in the above embodiment. Also in the characteristic part 73AK, the operation contents of the short initial operation and the long initial operation may be the same as those of the characteristic part 72AK of the present embodiment. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the effect control CPU 120 determines the received command from the main board 11 as in the above embodiment (steps 73AKS001 to 73AKS004). When it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command (step 73AKS003; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS005) as in the above embodiment, and the setting is changed. Control to start the notification is performed (step 73AKS006).

  After performing the control in step 73AKS006, it is determined whether or not to end the setting change (step 73AKS007). When the setting change is not completed (step 73AKS007; No), step 73AKS007 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change (step 73AKS007; Yes), control for ending the setting change notification is performed (step 73AKS008), and the game stop state end processing is executed (step 73AKS009). As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, control for executing the short initial operation as the return operation for returning the movable member to the origin position is not performed in the setting change state as the change permission state. .

  When it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command (step 73AKS001; Yes), after the game stop state end processing is executed in step 73AKS009, control for executing the short initial operation is executed. Perform (step 73AKS010), and then control to execute the long initial operation (step 73AKS011). In step 73AKS011, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS010 ends. By performing the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011, when the power supply is not started and the control is not controlled to the setting change state as the change permission state, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed. Further, when the setting change state as the change permission state is controlled with the start of the power supply, it is possible to perform the control of executing the short initial operation as the return operation after the setting change state is finished. Alternatively, if the setting is changed to the setting change state as the change permission state with the start of the power supply, after the setting change state is finished, the short initial operation that is the return operation is followed by the long initial operation that is the initial operation. Control can be performed to perform the action.

  Then, control for executing the initialization notification is performed (step 73AKS012). The control for executing the initialization notification may be performed before the control for executing the short initial operation or the long initial operation. Alternatively, the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed, the control for executing the initialization notification may be performed, and then the control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command (step 73AKS004; Yes), the game stop state start process is executed (step 73AKS013), and the setting confirmation is performed as in the above embodiment. Control for starting notification is performed (step 73AKS014). Then, control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS015). By executing the control in step 73AKS015, the control for executing the return operation for returning the movable member to the original position in the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It can be performed. Even in the period after the step 73AKS016 and thereafter, the control in step 73AKS015 may be continuously executed until the short initial operation period ends, and the control for executing the short initial operation may be performed.

  Following the control by step 73AKS015, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation is to be ended (step 73AKS016). When the setting confirmation is not completed (step 73AKS016; No), step 73AKS016 is repeatedly executed and stands by. When it is determined in step 73AKS016 to end the setting confirmation (step 73AKS016; Yes), control for ending the setting confirmation notification is performed (step 73AKS017), and the game stop state end process is executed (step 73AKS018). Next, control for executing the long initial operation is performed (step 73AKS019), and the power-on command processing is ended. By executing the control in step 73AKS019, after the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 ends, the long initial operation that is the initial operation of the movable member is executed. Control can be performed. In addition, since the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS019, when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value is set, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. It is possible not to control the execution of. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS019 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed.

  When it is determined in step 73AKS002 that the received command is the power failure recovery designation command (step 73AKS002; Yes), control for executing the short initial operation is performed (step 73AKS020), and then control for executing the long initial operation. (Step 73AKS021), the power-on command processing is terminated. In step 73AKS021, the control for executing the long initial operation may be started after the short initial operation by the control in step 73AKS020 ends. By executing the control in steps 73AKS020 and 73AKS021, when the power supply is not started and the setting change state as the change permission state is not controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation are performed. Control can be performed to perform the action. Even after the power-on command processing ends, the control in step 73AKS021 may be continuously executed until the long initial operation period ends, and control for executing the long initial operation may be performed. The control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by common processing using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02, as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK. Alternatively, the control in step 73AKS019 and the control in step 73AKS021 may be executed by different processes while using the common long initial control pattern 72AKP02 as in the case of the characteristic portion 72AK.

  FIG. 10-8 shows a setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 displayed during execution of the setting confirmation notification for the characteristic portion 73AK. On the setting confirmation notifying screen 73AKD01, a character image for notifying the message "setting confirmed" is displayed, and a history of set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. The history of set values may be cumulatively stored on the side of the effect control board 12 by storing the set value information together with the RTC (real time clock) information in a backup area of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12, for example. Good. Alternatively, the history of set values is stored in a predetermined area in a predetermined storage area (for example, a flash memory) separately from the RAM 122, and the set value information is stored together with the RTC information in the effect control board 12. It may be stored cumulatively on the side. Alternatively, as for the history of set values, in the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, the set value information is stored together with the RTC information in the backup area, and the setting confirmation start command is transmitted. In addition, by transmitting a set value history command prepared in advance as an effect control command capable of specifying the history of set values from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the effect control board 12 supplies power. It may be made possible to specify it with the start of.

  When the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01 is displayed, if the movable member is stopped at a position deviating from the origin position, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display screen of the effect display device 5, and the history of setting values is grasped. Hard to do. Therefore, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the control in step 73AKS015 is executed, so that it is possible to move when the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. Control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation for returning the member to the home position. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, unlike the case where the setting change state is controlled, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed. The history of the set values that can be displayed on the 73AKD01 can be easily grasped by an attendant of the game hall or the like. On the other hand, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, the long initial operation can be executed by the control in step 73AKS018, so the setting confirmation state for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When, the control for executing the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation is not performed. In this way, when the setting confirmation state is controlled with the start of power supply, in this setting confirmation state, the short initial operation that is the return operation is executed, while the long initial operation that is the initial operation is performed. Since the operation is not executed, the long initial operation is executed after it becomes possible for the staff member at the game arcade to easily understand the history of the setting values that can be displayed on the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01. In this case, it is possible to prevent the history of set values from being difficult to grasp due to the movable member.

  Note that the history of set values may be displayed even when the setting change state is controlled. In this case, in the setting change state as the change permission state, control for executing the short initial operation for returning the movable member to the origin position may be performed. In this way, when the set value history can be displayed by controlling the setting confirmation state with the start of power supply, the short initial operation, which is the return operation, is executed and the set value is set. The history may be easily grasped.

  As described above, in the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AKS001 that the received command is the RAM clear notification command, in step 73AKS010, control is performed to execute the short initial operation. . On the other hand, when it is determined in step 73AKS003 that the received command is the setting change start command, the control for executing the short initial operation is not performed until it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed. As a result, when the control for changing the set value is performed, the short initial operation that is the return operation for returning the movable member to the home position is not executed, so that the operation for changing the set value is not hindered by the return operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Therefore, the setting value can be set appropriately.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic portion 73AK, after it is determined in step 73AKS007 that the setting change is completed, the control in step 73AKS010 is performed, thereby performing control to execute the short initial operation as the return operation. In this way, after the setting change state as the change permission state is finished, the control to execute the short initial operation which is the return operation is performed. It is possible to properly return the member to the original position.

  In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the received command is determined to be the RAM clear notification command in step 73AKS001, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to perform the short initial operation that is the return operation. Then, control is performed to execute a long initial operation which is an initial operation. At this time, the control in step 73AKS012 is performed to perform the control for executing the initialization notification. In this way, the contents stored in the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) with the start of the power supply when the power is turned on, so that the initialization notification is given when the initialization related to the control of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute a short initial operation that is a return operation and then a long initial operation that is an initial operation. Also, when it is determined in step 73AKS007 to end the setting change, the control in steps 73AKS010 and 73AKS011 is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation and the long initial operation that is the initial operation. Take control. This makes it possible to standardize the operation of the movable members and reduce the control load for operating the movable members when preventing the work of changing the set value from being hindered. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  On the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, a history of set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be displayed. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when it is determined in step 73AK004 that the received command is the setting confirmation start command, control is performed to execute the short initial operation in step 73AKS015. In this way, when the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01, which is a setting confirmation display capable of displaying the history of set values, is being displayed, control is performed to execute the short initial operation that is the return operation. As a result, the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped when it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

  Based on the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of effect according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-on command processing of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the command 9100H which is the setting change start command is received in step 73AKS003, the received command is determined to be the setting change start command. The command 9100H that is the setting change start command transmitted from the main board 11 is different from the command 9000H that is the RAM clear notification command, the command 9200H that is the power failure recovery designation command, and the command 9400H that is the setting confirmation start command. In this way, when the power supply is started and the power supply is started, a command as information different from that in the case where the setting change state is not controlled is transmitted when the setting change state is allowed to change the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. To be done. As a result, when it is possible to prevent trouble in changing the set value, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the effect. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately change the set value.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Section 73AK)
Regarding the above-mentioned characteristic part 73AK, there is a game machine which is conventionally described in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 as a game machine which can be changed into a plurality of settings having different advantages for the player. Further, as a game machine for returning the movable member to the original position, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2016-221154. However, in the techniques described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 and Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-212154, no consideration has been given to the case where the setting change conflicts with the operation of the movable member. Therefore, there is a possibility that the work of changing to a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player may be hindered. Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 73AK for providing a gaming machine capable of preventing the trouble of changing the setting value,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) capable of playing a game and being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a big hit gaming state),
Setting means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the setting change processing in step Sa13) that can set any of the plurality of setting values (for example, any of the setting values 1 to 3);
Based on the set value that has been set, a game control means capable of proceeding with the game so that the degree of advantage for the player is different (for example, the CPU 103 that executes the special symbol process process of step S25),
Setting control means (eg, CPU 103 that executes the processing of step Sa6 and step Sa12) that can be controlled to a change permitted state that allows the setting value to be changed by the setting means when power supply is started;
A movable member operable according to the progress of the game (for example, a first movable member operated by the operation motors AK011 to AK013, a second movable member operated by the operation motor AK014, etc.),
At least, a movable control means capable of executing control of a return operation for returning the movable member to the original position (for example, a production control CPU 120 for executing power-on command processing in step AKS012),
The movable control means,
When the change permission state is not controlled due to the start of power supply, control is performed to execute the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
In the change permission state, the control for executing the return operation is not performed (for example, execution of steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be a game machine characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, since the returning operation for returning the movable member to the original position is not executed in the change permitted state, it is possible to prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
The movable control means performs control to execute the return operation after the change permission state ends (for example, execution of step 73AKS010),
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to properly operate the movable member and prevent the trouble of changing the set value.

As a gaming machine of the means 3 relating to the characteristic portion 73AK,
When the game machine is initialized along with the start of power supply, an initialization notification means for executing initialization notification (for example, effect display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, effect control CPU 120 for executing step 73AKS012). Etc.),
The movable control means,
When the initialization notification is executed, control is performed to execute an initial operation by the movable member following the return operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS010 to 73AKS012).
After the change permission state ends, control is performed to execute the initial operation following the return operation (for example, execution of step 73AKS010 following steps 73AKS005 to 73AKS009).
It may be the gaming machine of the means 1 or the means 2 according to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load by making the operation of the movable member common and prevent the work of changing the set value from being hindered.

As a gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
A setting display means (for example, effect display device 5) capable of executing a setting confirmation display for confirming the set value set by the setting means,
The setting display means can display a history of setting values set by the setting means in the setting confirmation display (for example, display of the setting confirmation notification screen 73AKD01),
When the setting confirmation display is being executed, the movable control means performs control to execute the return operation and does not execute control to execute the initial operation (for example, execution of steps 73AKS015, 73AKS016, etc.),
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 3 related to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, when the setting confirmation display is being executed, the initial operation by the movable member is prevented from being executed, so that the setting confirmation display can be easily grasped and the setting value changing operation may be hindered. Can be prevented.

As a gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 73AK,
Equipped with effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing command analysis processing of AKS015) that controls effect execution based on information from the game control means,
When the game control means is controlled to the change permission state with the start of power supply, the game control means transmits different information (for example, a command 9100H which is a setting change start command) from the case where the change permission state is not controlled. ,
The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 73AK.
In such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the control load of the effect control means and prevent the setting value changing operation from being disturbed.

(Relationship between characteristic parts 4AK, 72AK, 73AK)
The movable member in the characteristic portions 72AK and 73AK may be the movable body for production 4AK001 (4AK001L, 4AK001R) of the characteristic portion 4AK. The whole or part of the invention relating to the characteristic portions 72AK and 73AK may be applied to the returning operation (short initial operation) and the initial operation (long initial operation) of the production movable body 4AK001. Further, part or all of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 4AK may be applied to the characteristic portions 72AK and 73AK.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples of the embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification and the configurations shown in the below-described embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be considered that the above-described embodiments and the embodiments described below disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the following description, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), which has a first mode (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and a second mode ( For example, a production movable body (for example, production movable bodies 4AK001L, 4AK001R) capable of changing into a plurality of types of modes including FIG. (E.g. RAM 102) and a hold display means capable of displaying the hold display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode (e.g. snowman) and a second display mode (e.g. sun), corresponding to the reservation storage. For example, the effect control CPU 120) that displays the hold display on the image display device 5, and the effect movable body, when the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, the first mode or the first mode. 2 aspects When it is changeable and the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it is changeable to the first mode or the second mode, and the hold display is displayed in the first display mode. Also, when the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it is easier to change to the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)), and game control means capable of proceeding with the game ( For example, a CPU 103), an effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on information (for example, effect control command) from the game control means, and a plurality of different degrees of advantage for the player. Setting means (for example, the CPU 103) that can set any of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 6) of the stage, and establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, performing a setting change operation) Basis And a setting change unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting change value changing process) controllable to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed, and the effect control unit executes variable display. It is possible to cause a predetermined effecting means (for example, the image display device 5) to execute an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern specifying command) that specifies, and the predetermined effecting means is controlled to the setting change state. 13D, the operation based on the information designating execution of the variable display is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 is controlled when the setting change state is set). , Even if the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, the fluctuation pattern designation command is discarded, so control based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command is not executed. Techniques can be cited.
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to such a configuration, even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

  Further, the movable body effect and the set value may be associated with each other. For example, the execution ratio of the movable body effect may be different between when the set value is 1 and when the set value is 6. When the set value is 6, by increasing the execution ratio of the movable body effect, the player can infer the set value from the execution ratio of the movable body effect, which improves the interest.

  Further, the display mode of the hold display and the set value may be associated with each other. For example, the display ratio of either the first display mode or the second display mode may be different between the case where the set value is 1 and the case where the set value is 6. By doing so, the player can infer the set value from the execution ratio of the display mode of the hold display, and the interest is improved.

In addition, the set value may be suggested according to the operation mode of the production movable body. For example, the operation mode in the process in which the effect movable body changes to the first mode or the second mode is selected from among a plurality of types by lottery or the like, and each operation mode of the effect movable body is changed according to the set value. By making the selection ratios different, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the easier it is to perform the movable body effect in the specific type of operation mode. By doing so, the operation mode of the production movable body is rich in variation, and moreover, it is possible to give the player an opportunity to infer the set value by the appearance ratio of each operation mode of the production movable body. Can be improved.
Further, when the effectable movable body changes to the first aspect or the second aspect, the set value suggesting effect may be performed by the image display device. For example, when the effectable movable body changes to the first aspect or the second aspect, a character is displayed on the image display device, and a plurality of types of the character are displayed each time the effectable movable body changes to the first aspect or the second aspect. By selecting by lottery or the like from among the above, and by varying the selection ratio of each character according to the set value that is set, the more advantageous the set value that is set for the player, the better the effect by the specific type of character. It may be performed easily. By doing so, the setting value suggestion effect will be performed when the effect in which the effect movable body is changed is executed, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of the present invention is, in addition, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), which has a first mode (for example, FIG. 8-3 (D)) and a second mode ( 8-4 (E)), and a specific display unit capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and a production movable body (for example, production movable bodies 4AK001L, 4AK001R) that can be changed into a plurality of types of modes. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that displays an active display on the image display device 5), and the specific display unit includes a plurality of types including a first display mode (for example, a snowman) and a second display mode (for example, the sun). The specific display can be displayed in the display mode, and the production movable body can be changed to the first mode or the second mode when the specific display is displayed in the first display mode, The second display mode When the specific display is displayed, the specific display can be changed to the first mode or the second mode, and the specific display can be displayed in the second display mode more than when the specific display is displayed in the first display mode. When is displayed, it is easier to change to the second mode (for example, FIG. 8-6 (D)), and game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing the game,
Based on information (for example, a production control command) from the game control means, a production control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of controlling production, and a plurality of set values (for example, a production level having different advantages for the player). , Setting values 1 to 6) that can be set to any one of the setting values, and based on whether a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a setting confirmation operation is performed), A setting confirmation unit (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation process) that can be controlled in a confirmable setting confirmation state is provided, and the effect control unit specifies information for executing variable display ( For example, it is possible to cause a predetermined effect means (for example, the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9) to execute an operation based on the variation pattern designation command, and the predetermined effect. When the stage is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the stage does not execute the operation based on the information designating the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 sets the setting. A gaming machine that does not execute control based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command because the variation pattern designation command is discarded even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled in the confirmation state).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. According to such a configuration, even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means from malfunctioning.

  Further, as a gaming machine that can enhance the interest and can perform suitable control, a gaming machine that executes variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (eg, big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player (eg, pachinko gaming machine) 1), which is a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of advancing a game, and an effect control means (for example, an effect control command) capable of controlling an effect based on information (for example, an effect control command) from the game control means. Effect control CPU 120), setting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different degrees of advantage for the player, and a predetermined condition Based on the establishment of (for example, the setting change operation is performed), the setting change means (for example, the CPU 103) that can control the setting value to change the setting value can be set. And a portion for executing setting variable value changing processing), and the effect control means performs an operation based on information (for example, a variation pattern designation command) designating execution of variable display by a predetermined effect means (for example, image). It is possible to cause the display device 5) to execute, and the predetermined effect means does not perform an operation based on information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting change state (for example, As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Game machines that do not execute control based on the reception of the game. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

  (Other form examples)

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 207SG of the present embodiment)
Next, the characteristic part 207SG of another embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-7, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 207SG001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board (gauge that constitutes a gaming board surface. Board 2 and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 207SG003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball serving as a game medium is launched into the game area by a predetermined ball launching device. Further, a glass door frame 207SG003a having a glass window is provided on the gaming machine frame 207SG003 between a door open position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and a door closed position that closes the front surface of the gaming machine frame 207SG003. The glass door frame 207SG003a is rotatably provided so that the game area can be opened and closed. When the glass door frame 207SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  In addition, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade into a lock (not shown) to unlock it, and a player other than the store clerk can open the gaming machine frame 207SG003 and the glass. The door frame 207SG003a cannot be opened.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11A, the left side of the image display device 5 in the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is formed in a left game area 207SG002L where game balls can flow down, and the game board The right side of the image display device 5 in 2 is formed in the right game area 207SG002R where the game balls can flow down.

  The left game area 207SG002L is a game area in which a relatively weakly launched (left hitting) game ball flows down by the operation of the hit ball operation handle 30, and the right game area 207SG002R is a left game area 207SG002L by operation of the hit ball operation handle 30. A game ball that is stronger (right-handed) than a game ball that flows down is a game area that flows down after passing through the upper path 207SG002C of the image display device 5.

  In addition, the general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 207SG002L, and in the right game area 207SG002R from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 207SG002R, the passage gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, the general A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L can be won in the first starting prize hole formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R is variable. The second start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 can be won and the passage gate 41 can be passed.

  As shown in FIG. 11-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 207SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 207SG002L cannot win the second starting winning opening or the big winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 207SG002R cannot enter the first starting winning opening. Has become.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-2 and 11-7, the main board 11 in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment is housed in a board case 207SG201 configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a closed state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 207SG051 for switching the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable setting value state, and a jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate), etc., which will be described later in the setting value change state. A setting switch 207SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value and an opening sensor 207SG090 that detects opening of the gaming machine frame 207SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the setting value changing state in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment is a state in which a clerk at a game hall can confirm the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (setting value confirmation). State).

  The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052, is housed in the substrate case 207SG201 together with the main substrate 11, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting switching switch 207SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 207SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 207SG201.

  Since the board case 207SG201 having the lock switch 207SG051 and the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate when the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. By using the game machine frame 207SG003 to open, it becomes possible to operate. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade, so that only the store clerk who possesses the setting key can operate it. Further, the lock switch 207SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later with a setting key. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but they may be combined with one key.

  Further, a display monitor 207SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged on the board case 207SG201. The display monitor 207SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged above the board case 207SG201. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 is arranged on the front surface when the main board 11 in the board case 207SG201 is viewed. The main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is not opened. Therefore, the front side when visually recognizing the main board 11 is the rear surface side of the gaming board 2 in the state where the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened. It is the front when viewed, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-1 and 11-2, at a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the game area) of the game board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, First special symbol display device 207SG004A capable of executing the variable display of the first special symbol, second special symbol display device 207SG004B capable of performing the variable display of the second special symbol, first hold capable of displaying the first reserved memory number Display device 207SG025A, second holding display device 207SG025B capable of displaying the second holding storage number, normal symbol display device 207SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal design, general figure holding display device 207SG025C capable of displaying the general figure holding storage number , Round display 207SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds of the big hit game (big hit type) during the big hit game, high base state (time saving state) and large The right striking lamp 207SG132 that lights up in the gaming state in which the game ball such as the gaming state is launched toward the right gaming area 207SG002R, the probability variation lamp 207SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time saving state). A game information display unit 207SG200 is collectively arranged.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-4, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of 8 segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is a loss or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed with a common combination. ing.

  When the variable display result in the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A is a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derivation display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is a variable display with two types of big hit symbols (combination of illuminated LEDs) for each big hit type. Results and derivation display are possible.

  In the feature portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are different between the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, but the first special symbol display device. The big hit symbol that can be derived and displayed on the 207SG004A and the big hit symbol that can be derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may at least partially overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 11-5, the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B each have four segment LEDs arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, if the number of reserved memories is one, only the LED at the left end is turned on, and the second from the left each time the number of reserved memories increases, The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left are sequentially turned on. Then, each time the variable display is executed, in response to the reduction (consumption) of the pending storage, the LED in the pending display corresponding to the variable display is moved in a predetermined shift direction (in other embodiments). The characteristic portion 207SG is turned off toward the left).

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of another embodiment, when both the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure pending storage is preferentially executed. It is supposed to be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 11-6, for example, when there is one first special figure reserved memory and two second special figure reserved memories (only the LED at the left end of the first reserved indicator 207SG025A). Is lit and the left two LEDs of the second hold indicator 207SG25B are lit), the second special figure hold memory is 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. After that, the variable display based on the first special figure pending storage is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the round indicator 207SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). In addition, as the big hit type in the feature portion 207SG of the other embodiment, there are provided a total of three big hit types: a big hit A which is a 5 round big hit, a big hit B which is a 10 round big hit, and a big hit C which is a 15 round big hit. However, which of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is lit differs depending on the type of jackpot.

  The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control the voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used for controlling the lighting operation of the decorative LED.

  In addition, on the effect control board 12 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322 operable between the respective origin positions and the effect positions during variable display and the like, The origin detection sensor 207SG331 capable of detecting that the first movable body 207SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 207SG321, and the second movable body 207SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 207SG322. The origin detection sensor 207SG332 capable of detecting the presence of the sensor is connected.

  FIG. 11-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 207SG in another embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals forming the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command that designates variation start in the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display device 207SG004A. The command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating variation start in the special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a design. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the designated variation pattern.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is a production control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “miss”, “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), Or different EXT data depending on the determination result (big hit type determination result) which one of a plurality of big hit types is used when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “miss”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “big hit A” and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type decided result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the advance determination result that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command that designates a variation stop (determination) of the decorative symbol in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time saving control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , The second game state designation command corresponding to the (time saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormality) specification command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to identify which error (abnormality) has occurred on the production control board 12 side. Therefore, the occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification processing described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image showing the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening open notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the special winning opening, which notifies that it is a period during which the special winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening opening notification command and the big winning opening opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of times of execution of the round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state (for example, "1" to "15"). To be done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. It is the 1st starting opening winning a prize designation command which notifies that the 1st starting condition for executing the special drawing game which uses the 1st special drawing in 1st special design indicator 207SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , Is a second start winning combination designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special drawing game using the second special drawing on the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning award designating command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command cause the special figure game to start when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command or the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, the total pending storage number notification command for notifying the increase (or decrease) of the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and activated (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the setting value changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation for changing the setting value has ended in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The command E105H is a set value confirmation start notification command for notifying that the operation for confirming the set value has started in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started in the set value confirming state). The command E106H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the operation of confirming the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a program for game control to perform a control operation, and a numerical data that indicates a random number value is updated independently of the CPU 103. A random number circuit 104 for performing, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information are configured.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101 to read fixed data, the CPU 103 writes variable data to the RAM 102 to temporarily store various data, and the CPU 103 writes various floating data to the RAM 102. The CPU 103 stores various data to be temporarily stored in the RAM 102. A variable data read operation for reading out, a reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and a CPU 103 outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals are also performed.

  FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-9, in the characteristic portion 207SG of this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for determining the universal figure display result, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. A random number value other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted in the CPU 103 by software update using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random number used to control the progress of such a game is also called a game random number.

  Although the other embodiments exemplify a mode in which each of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-9, the other invention is not limited to this and each of The range of the random number values MR1 to MR5 may be different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 11-10 shows a variation pattern in another embodiment. In another embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, and A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the variation display result is a “big hit”. Further, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “miss” and the variation display mode of the decorative pattern is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “miss”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. A variation pattern corresponding to a variation display result of "small hit" is referred to as a small hit variation pattern.

  The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. Although only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided in the other embodiments, other inventions are not limited to this, and like normal reach α, normal reach β, ... Like super reach. Alternatively, a plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Further, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in the characteristic unit 207SG of the other embodiment is executed, the super reach variation pattern of super reach α, super reach It is set shorter than β. In addition, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β in another embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super reach production of super reach β is performed In this case, the special figure variation time is set to be longer than the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach α is executed.

  In another embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set in such a manner that the variation display result is a “big hit”, and the jackpot expectation degree is set to be high. Therefore, the normal reach variation pattern is set. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, as will be described later, these variation patterns are classified into variation pattern types such as non-reach type, normal reach type, and super reach type. Is not determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined variation pattern, only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination is determined without determining these types. However, other inventions are not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination is provided, After determining the type of the variation pattern from the random value for determining the variation pattern type, the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from down.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-10, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is predetermined for each variation pattern, but the other invention is The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the case of the normal reach lost variation pattern PA2-1, when the set value that is set is 1, it is a variation pattern that causes the normal reach lost, and when the set value is 2, pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value that is set is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach loss, the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times and the variation pattern that becomes super reach loss is set.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that forms a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. Further, in the ROM 101, table data forming a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or an ordinary symbol. A variation pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variation patterns that are stored is stored.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 is, for example, the display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 11-11 (A), the display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 11-11 (B), -11 (C) display result determination table (setting value 3), FIG. 11-12 (A) display result determination table (setting value 4), FIG. 11-12 (B) display result determination table (setting value 4) Setting value 5), display result determination table (setting value 6) shown in FIG. 11-12 (C), jackpot type determination table (for first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), FIG. 11-13 ( B) big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), big hit variation pattern determination table, small hit variation pattern determination table, lost variation pattern determination table, public figure display result determination table (not shown), universal figure Contains such dynamic pattern determination table (not shown).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, the winning probability (ball-out rate) of the big hit is changed according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process described later, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball-out rate) is changed. . The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value becomes smaller in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage becomes gradually lower. In other words, the set value is the largest value of 6, which is the most unfavorable value for the amusement hall side, and the smaller the value of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the more advantageous the amusement hall side is. Become.

  11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and FIGS. 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C) are explanatory views showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but other inventions are not limited to this. Instead, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) to FIG. 11-11 (C) and FIG. 11-12 (A) to FIG. 11-12 (C), in each display result determination table, the game state is a probable change state ( In the high accuracy state), more determination values are assigned to the special jackpot display result of the “big hit” than in the normal state or the time saving state (low accuracy state). Thereby, in the probability variation state (high precision state) in which the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low precision state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is controlled. Then, the probability determined (in the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, and 1/260 when the set value is 3, Compared with 1/240 when the setting value is 4, 1/220 when the setting value is 5, 1/200 when the setting value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and the big hit game state is set. The probability of being determined to be controlled is high (in the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, 1/140 when the setting value is 4, 1/100 For if value is 5 1/120, the set value 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability changing state (highly accurate state), it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled as compared to the normal state and the time saving state. The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so as to be higher.

  In addition, in each display result determination table, the determination value is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special figure display result is “small hit” and controlled to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state and the set value. Has been. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-11 (A) to FIG. 11-11 (C) and FIG. 11-12 (A) to FIG. 11-12 (C), regardless of the game state and the set value, The special figure display result is set as "small hit" and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the probability that the special figure display result is set as "small hit" regardless of the set value and the small hit game state is controlled is the same probability. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the probability of determining to control the small hitting game state as the small hitting result may be different according to the set value.

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability that it is decided to control the jackpot gaming state with the special map display result as "big hit" is the largest. The lower the value of the set value, the larger the value of the special value is assigned to the judgment value so that the probability of being determined to control the big hit game state as "big hit" is set (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> set value 4> set value 3> set value 2> set value 1).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and the value of MR1 is shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and FIG. 11-12. If any of the hit determination values corresponding to the big hit shown in (A) to FIG. 11-12 (C) is matched, it is determined that the special design is a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). Also, MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and FIGS. 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C). Then, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and FIGS. 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C) is the probability (ratio) of being a big hit and the small hit. Indicates the probability (rate) of Also, determining whether to make a big hit is to decide whether to control the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B stop symbols in It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to control the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, the CPU 103 displays the images shown in FIGS. 11-11 (A) to 11-11 (C) and FIGS. 11-12 (A) to 11-12 (C). The result determination table is used to determine whether to make a big hit or a small hit, but a big hit judgment table and a small hit judgment table are provided separately for each set value, and the variable display result is made a big hit. Whether or not to make a small hit may be individually determined.

  In other embodiments, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a total of six setting values 1 to 6 that can be set, but other inventions are not limited to this, and pachinko machines are not limited to this. The set values that can be set in the gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

  11-13 (A) and 11-13 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 11-13 (A), using the pending storage based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed) determines the jackpot type It is a table when doing. In addition, FIG. 11-13 (B) uses the pending storage based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed) to determine the jackpot type. It is a case table.

  The jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C, based on the random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination. Is a table that is referenced to determine

  Here, the jackpot type in the characteristic part 207SG of another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-14. In the feature portion 207SG of the other embodiment, as a big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as an uncertain variation big hit) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to shift to the low certainty high base state, and the big hit game. After the end of, the high-accuracy control and the time reduction control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a probable variation big hit) are set in which the high-precision high-base state is entered.

  The big hit game state by "big hit A" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by "B" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the big hit game state by "big hit C" is a normally open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that a special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment), or the predetermined number of times. Before the special figure game is executed, the big hit game state is entered and the game ends.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control which are executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B or the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, when the big hit which is generated again is big hit B or big hit C, because the high-precision control and the time saving control are executed again after the big hit game state ends, the big hit game state continues without going through the normal state. It occurs in the so-called condominium state.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, an example in which three types of big hit A to big hit C are provided as big hit types, but other inventions are not limited to this, and big hit types. 2 or less, or 4 or more may be provided.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), if the setting value is "1", of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2. , 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to the jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "3", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “4”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 190 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. Further, when the setting value is "5", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of the MR2. , 170 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the first special symbol, only the time saving control is executed after the big hitting game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special figure is the first special symbol, the highest payout rate is when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the payout rate.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the setting value is "1", the determination value range of MR2 is from 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C. When the set value is "2", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 180 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B in the range of the MR2 determination values of 0 to 299. , 160 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is "4", 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. , 140 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “5”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B, out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2. , 120 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “6”, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C in the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of the MR2. (The jackpot B is not assigned a judgment value).

  In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special drawing game of the second special symbol, only the short-time control is executed after the big-hit game is finished, while the proportion for determining the big-hit A is the same, while the time-short control is finished after the big-hit game is finished. Among the big hit B and the big hit C for which both the probability change control and the probability change control are executed, the proportions for determining the big hit C become lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, if the variation special symbol is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set value is 5, 4, 3, 2, The smaller the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, when the variation special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is the big hit B. It exemplifies a form that is not determined, that is, that the jackpot type determination rate differs depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%) However, even when the variation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, even if the big hit type is decided to be the big hit B Good.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different according to the set value that is set, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. It is like this.

  In the feature portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the big hit type is determined by using the random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, but other inventions are not limited to this. May be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the special figure display result.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is to the player (the jackpot probability is increased, and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and a smaller set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be advantageous to the player.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, while the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game itself does not change, but another example is shown. The invention is not limited to this, and the gaming property may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is a game characteristic of looping at a rate of 65% (so-called probability variation loop type), When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the probability of a big hit in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big hit game. While the gaming state after the big hit game is finished is controlled to a probable state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V that the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the variation special map). If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time saving control). Special variable ball A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and A setting may be provided in which the small hit probability is high, but the number of prize balls obtainable during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6). .

  Further, in this way, when changing the game characteristic according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set values are 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a performance switch (every time a game ball passes through a predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot gaming state).

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. It is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern determination table for the big hit used when it is predetermined that the variation display result is "big hit" and the variation display result is "small hit" The jackpot variation pattern determination table that is used when it is predetermined, and the variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when it is determined that the variation display result is "miss" is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation patterns of the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

  As shown in FIGS. 11-15 (A) and 11-15 (B), as the big hit variation pattern determination table, the big hit variation pattern determination table (big hit A is used when the big hit type is big hit A. Jackpot) and jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (jackpot B, jackpot C) used when jackpot types are jackpot B and jackpot C, and these jackpot variation pattern judgment tables (jack jacks) A) and the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits B and big hits C) show fluctuation patterns for normal reach big hits (PB1-1), fluctuation patterns for super reach α big hits (PB1-2), and super reach β big hits. For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a part of the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take A constant random number value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hits A), when the setting value is “1”, one of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment values of MR3 is set. Up to 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot variation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the β big hit. When the set value is “2”, 1 to 380 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 381 to 835. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 360 of the judgment value range of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 361 to 820. Are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 340 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 341 to 805. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 320 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 321 to 790. Are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 791 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 301 to 775 are set. Are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B, big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the judgment value range of MR3 is from 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), 201 to 550 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is "2", from 1 to 997 of the judgment value range of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 511 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns of super-reach β big hits (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", 1 to 160 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). Further, when the set value is "4", in the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit, and 431 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is “5”, 1 to 120 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 121 to 390 are set. It is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α big hit (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β big hit (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the range of MR3 determination values of 1 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot and 101 to 350 are assigned. The variation patterns (PB1-2) of super-reach α big hits are assigned, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the variation patterns (PB1-3) of super-reach β big hits.

  In this way, when the big hit A is won in the special drawing game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β big hit (PB1-3). And set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 become lower in this order. In addition, when the big hit B or the big hit C is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit determines the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit. It is higher than the ratio and lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  That is, in another embodiment, when the determination values are “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super-reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In some cases, since the super-reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, when the variation pattern of the super-reach β is executed, it may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. It is possible to increase the expectation of the person.

  Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value is a determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the setting value is any of 1 to 6, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. Among them, 0 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern (PC1-1) of the small hit. Although only the PC 1-1 is provided as the variation pattern for small hits in the present embodiment, other inventions are not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as variation patterns for small hits. Alternatively, the variation pattern of the small hit may be determined from the plurality of variation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

  In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss, the variation pattern determination table A for loss, which is used when the number of pending storage is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to time saving control, and the low base Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total pending storage number is 2 to 4 in the state, and loss variation used when the total pending storage number is 5 to 8 in the low base state The pattern determination table C and the variation pattern determination table D for loss, which is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed, are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of β-miss (PA2-3) within the range of the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), in the variation pattern determination table A for loss (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 431 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “3”, among the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 411 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “4”, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1) in the determination value range 1 to 997 of MR3, and 391 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 371 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “6”, 1 to 350 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 351 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table B for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super reach corresponding to the total pending storage number of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the α-miss variation (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for loss B (for the number of low-base medium total pending storage numbers 2 to 4), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 In the range 1 to 997 of 1 to 500, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach lose variation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “2”, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 481 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 460 of the judgment value range 0 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 461 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “4”, 1 to 440 of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 441 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “5”, out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2), and 421 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the setting value is “6”, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 401 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table C for loss, a shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), a normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and a super-reach that correspond to a total pending storage number of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the α-miss variation (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of the super reach β-loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 11-16 (C), in the variation pattern determination table C for loss (for 5 or more low base medium total pending storage numbers), when the setting value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach-loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 of the range of judgment values of MR3 of 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “4”, 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 491 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 471 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-3), and 451 to 700 are set. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), a variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and a variation pattern of super reach α loss (corresponding to during the time saving control). PA2-2), a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3) within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

  As shown in FIG. 11-10 (D), in the variation pattern determination table for loss D (for high base), when the setting value is “1”, among the determination value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are super reach α. The variation pattern of the loss (PA2-2) is assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of the super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) in the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 531 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, and 511 to 700 are assigned. The normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1) is assigned, 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-1). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  When the set value is “4”, 1 to 490 out of the range of judgment values 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 491 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). Further, when the setting value is “5”, 1 to 470 of the judgment value range 1 to 997 of MR3 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4), and 471 to 700 are set. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3). When the set value is “6”, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-4) out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, and 451 to 700 are assigned. It is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 is assigned to the super reach α loss variation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach β loss variation pattern (PA2-2). It is assigned to PA2-3).

  As described above, when the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D are used, the rate of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than the rate of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the rate of determining the normal reach variation pattern. Is set to be lower in the order of set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. When using the variation pattern determination tables for loss A to D, regardless of the variation pattern determination table, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the variation patterns of the super reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the super reach β loss. If each variation pattern is assigned, that is, if the variation display result is a loss, the variation pattern of super reach is determined by a common determination rate regardless of the set value. It is possible to prevent the staging effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display due to is not executed.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are completely set as the variation patterns for the loss between the set values. Although the same form is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and the determination rate of the variation pattern of these super-reach α loss and the determination rate of the variation pattern of super-reach β loss are each set. The values may be slightly different (for example, about 1%).

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value that is set. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of all variation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, super reach is set regardless of the set value that is set. It may be the same, or only the determination rate of the variation pattern of either non-reach or normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a loss, The determination rate of only one of the variation pattern of the reach α loss variation and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach α loss and the variation pattern of the super reach β loss are irrespective of the set value that is set. Although the example in which both of the determination ratios of are the same regardless of the set value is set, other inventions are not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, Regardless of the set value that is set, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value that is set.

  In the characteristic part 207SG of another embodiment, when the variation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of the variation pattern of non-reach or normal reach is different depending on the set value that is set. However, depending on the set value that has been set, there may be one or more undetermined variation patterns among the non-reach variation patterns and the normal reach variation patterns. That is, when the determination rate of the variation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to determine by the ratio of.

  The fluctuation time of the non-reach-miss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach-miss variation pattern without reduction (PA1-1), and the non-reach-loss variation is shorter than that of the variation pattern (PA1-2). The pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 11-10). Therefore, when the number of pending storages is increased, the variation pattern of non-reach loss with a short variation time is determined, the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of 4. Occasionally, by making a start winning, it becomes difficult to generate a useless start winning that is not held, and when the number of holding memories decreases, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss without a long shortening By determining PA1-1), it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the time for the variable display becomes long.

  Further, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-16 (A) to 11-16 (C), different variation pattern determination tables for loss are used according to the total number of pending storages. Although the mode for determining the fluctuation pattern is illustrated, the other invention is not limited to this, and the number of pending storage in the special symbol of the fluctuation target (for example, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, The number of reserved storages of the first special symbol, the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol when performing the variable display of the second special symbol) Good.

  Further, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any value of 1 to 6, the variation of the super reach loss. The ranges of the random number values assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) are the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability are different according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss (variation pattern of the super reach loss) The appearance rate) varies depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the variation display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach loss in accordance with the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by way of example. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable reach display is displayed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is also possible to carry out the change pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11A may be a backup RAM that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). It In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling progress of a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It is provided with a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The 1st special figure reservation storage section, the game ball has passed (entered) the 1st starting winning a prize mouth which the winning a prize ball device 6A forms, the starting winning a prize (the 1st starting winning a prize) occurs, but the special drawing which is not started yet Hold data of a game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 207SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning number into the first starting winning opening (detection order of gaming balls) with the holding number, and establishes the first starting condition in passing (entry) of the gaming ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, the numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. It is stored until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The pending data thus stored in the first special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special figure reservation storage unit has a game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has been generated but has not been started yet. The pending data of the figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 207SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure hold storage unit associates the hold number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second start winning hole, and establishes the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters). Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 and the like a random number value MR1 for the variable display result determination, a random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination, a numerical value data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, etc. It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The pending data thus stored in the second special figure pending storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is pending, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display result ), It becomes the hold information that enables the determination of whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the game ball passing (entry) through the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passing (entry) through the second starting winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start prize may be stored in the common hold storage unit in association with the hold number. In this case, starting port data indicating which of the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port the game ball has passed (entered) is included in the holding information and may be stored in association with the holding number. .

  The ordinary figure reservation storage unit stores the retained information of the ordinary figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20, although the game ball that has passed through the passage gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the public figure reservation storage unit is associated with a reservation number in the order in which a game ball passes through a passage gate, and is used for determining a general figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data and stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update the software by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values that are not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical value data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values, and are periodically set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or a calculation process on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 11-17A, the display monitor 207SG029 includes a first display unit 207SG029A, a second display unit 207SG029B, a third display unit 207SG029C, and a fourth display unit 207SG029D. Each of the first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E is composed of 7 segments configured by 7 segments that draw a letter "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 207SG029A to the fifth display unit 207SG29E are capable of lighting and blinking in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white and the like. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

  In addition, the display control of the display monitor 207SG029 in the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment is performed by using the non-test area in the entire area of the ROM 101 or the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

  On the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 11-17 (B) and FIG. 11-17 (C), the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for every out 6000 balls in the full gaming state. Base L that is (real-time value during measurement), base 1 that is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accurate low base state) for each first out 6000 balls in all game states, and in all game states Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low-probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out for the second time, and the normal state (low-probability low base state) for every 6000 balls out for the third time in all game states Base 3, which is the base value calculated in step 3, can be displayed. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 in percentage.

  When actually displaying the base L on the display monitor 207SG029, in order to display "bL." Which is an abbreviation for the base L, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (values of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “1.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b1.” Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “2.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b2.” Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, “b” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A and “3.” is displayed on the second display unit 207SG029B in order to display the abbreviation “b3.” Of the base. Is displayed, and the upper two digits (value of “00” to “99”) of the calculated value are displayed on the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D.

  In the display monitor 207SG029 according to another embodiment, control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, as shown in FIG. 11-19, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display on the display monitor 207SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5 second intervals. The display color of each base value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-18, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “1”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in white, and the pachinko gaming machine is displayed. When the set value set to 1 is "2", each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", it is displayed. Each base value on the monitor 207SG029 is displayed in yellow, and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is “4”, each base value in the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in green, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed. When the set value set to “5” is “5”, each base value on the display monitor 207SG029 is displayed in red and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If you set value is "6" displays the base value in the display monitor 207SG029 at purple. Therefore, a clerk or the like in the game arcade can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 207SG029, without the CPU 103 performing the set value changing process described later. ing.

  Next, the game control main processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets an interrupt prohibition (207SGSa001). Then, necessary initial setting is performed (207SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, setting of a register of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (207SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (207SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017 and the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (207SGSa003; Y, 207SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether or not the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (207SGSa005).

  When the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and when the setting value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (207SGSa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process, which will be described later, was being executed before the power failure (power failure occurred while the setting value changing process was being executed). It is determined whether or not (207SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (207SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing to be described later has been executed. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (207SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (207SGSa008).

  When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear processing for clearing the RAM 102 is executed (207SGSa009), the RAM clear flag is set again, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 (207SGSa010). If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa008; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa011 without executing 207SGSa009 and 207SGSa010.

  In 207SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa012). When the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the lock switch 207SG051 being ON and the gaming machine frame 207SG003 being opened (207SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa013a).

  When the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (207SGSa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014, and the RAM clear flag. If is not set (207SGSa013a; N), a set value confirmation process (207SGSa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa014.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa011; N) or the open sensor is OFF (207SGSa012; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa014 without executing the processes of 207SGSa013a to 207SGSa013c.

  In 207SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated this time (whether or not the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) is executed) ( 207SGSa014). If the RAM clear flag is set (207SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa022, and if the RAM clear flag is not set (207SGSa014; N), the power supply to the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Recovery processing for returning to the state (207SGSa015) is performed.

  In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the variation of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, and sends a command for restoration including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 207SGSa028. (207SGSa016).

  Further, in 207SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is operated (207SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (207SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018) or the open sensor 207SG090 is ON (207SGSa019).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa018; Y) and the open sensor 207SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or the normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, and the lock switch 207SG051 is turned on, while operating the clear switch, the pachinko gaming machine is operated. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (207SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (207SGSa021). Then, the processes of 207SGSa009 to 207SGSa016 described above are executed.

  If the clear switch is OFF (207SGSa017; N), the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF (207SGSa018; N), or the open sensor 207SG090 is OFF (207SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa031.

  Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a command at the time of restoration including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start (207SGSa022). Then, the cold start notification timer corresponding to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set (207SGSa023), and as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are The cold start notification is started by starting the blinking (207SGSa024).

  After executing 207SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (207SGSa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer has not timed out (207SGSa026; N), the processes of 207SGSa025 and 207SGGSa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer has timed out (207SGSa026; Y), all segments in the display monitor 207SG029. Ends blinking (207SGSa027), and proceeds to 207SGSa028.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of another embodiment, at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, all segments constituting the display monitor 207SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds). Although illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, only some of the segments composing the display monitor 207SG029 are made to blink. Alternatively, at least some of the segments forming the display monitor 207SG029 may be turned on.

  Then, in 207SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (207SGSa028) for initializing the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to take a timer interrupt at regular intervals (for example, 2 ms). The built-in CTC register is set (207SGSa029), and interrupts are enabled (207SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Further, in 207SGSa031, the CPU 103 tells the effect control board 12 that the abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error), that the power is restored from the power interruption during the setting change described later, or the like. Then, an error designation command corresponding to the abnormal setting value is transmitted (207SGSa031). Further, the error notification execution waiting timer is set (207SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (207SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer has not timed out (207SGSa034; N), the processing of 207SGSa033 and 207SGSa034 is repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (207SGSa034; Y), FIG. As shown in (B), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit 207SG029B included in the display monitor 207SG029 are used as notifications (error notifications) of occurrence of a setting value error and recovery from power interruption during setting change. , “E.” is displayed on each of the third display unit 207SG029C and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (207SGSa035).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (B), the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs configuring the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa036), and the pachinko game machine 1 A security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of a game arcade through a terminal board (not shown) provided in the above, and the process proceeds to 207SGSa032 (207SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 207SGSa032 to 207SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk or the like in the game hall), thereby displaying the monitor 207SG029. , The first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B by the error occurrence notification.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment displays the display monitor 207SG029, when the abnormal set value is set or when the set power is restored from the power interruption during the change of the set value. 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A, because the error notification by the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is executed, the clerk of the game hall, etc., the occurrence of an error and the set value from both the front and back sides of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power has been restored during the change. In addition, since the occurrence of an error in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recovery from the power interruption while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the gaming hall, the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Has become.

  Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or in 207SGSa021 the set value is changed. Although the mode in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the middle flag is illustrated, the other invention is not limited to this, and the other invention is not limited to this. In the RAM clear processing, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014. Place (207SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

  FIG. 11-21 (A) is a flowchart showing the RAM clear processing (207SGSa009) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control surface processing. In the RAM clear processing, the CPU 103 first designates the second address from the top in the RAM 102 (207SGSa041). Next, "00H" is set (stored) in the designated address (207SGSa042). Then, it is determined whether the designated address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043). When the designated address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is designated (207SGSa044), and the designated address is the address (F002) storing the RAM clear flag. It is determined whether or not (207SGSa45).

  If the specified address is not the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa042, and if the specified address is the address storing the RAM clear flag (207SGSa045; N), the Address is designated and the process proceeds to 207SGSa042 (207SGSa046). When the designated address is the last address of the RAM 102 (207SGSa043; Y), the RAM clearing process ends.

  In the RAM 102 in the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to each storage area, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B). Of these storage areas, a setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and a second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 will be described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, a RAM clear flag is stored in the third address (F002). At other addresses (F003 and later), special figure holding storage, general figure holding storage, various counter values, various timers, various flags, and game information including error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored. . The backup data (including the backup flag) is stored in a specific backup data storage area among the areas in which other information is stored. A value (for example, a set value “0”) indicating the factory shipping state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102 at the time of factory shipment. Incidentally, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a state where the value indicating the factory shipment state is set in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, the setting change process may be executed without fail, or the image may be changed. You may urge to restart the pachinko gaming machine 1 for executing the setting change process by the display on the display device 5 or the like.

  That is, the RAM clearing process in the characteristic unit 207SG of the other embodiment is a process of clearing the data other than the set value and the RAM clear flag by storing "00H" in the address excluding the set value.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in another embodiment, an example is shown in which data other than the set value is cleared in the RAM clear processing, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is booted by cold start, only the game information stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 or later in the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment) may be cleared.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG in another embodiment, the form in which the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the other invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear flag is used for game control. By storing in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, one of an accumulator that is the center of calculation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register), the process of storing and reading the RAM clear flare in the RAM 102 is omitted. However, the processing load of the CPU 103 may be reduced. When the RAM clear flag is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved more than when the RAM clear flag is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent the information (data) from being overwritten.

  FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing the setting value change processing (207SGSa013b) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value changing process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa051), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa052, see FIG. 11-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 11-6) according to the setting value changing process. Is turned on (207SGSa052a).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa053), and determines whether or not any one of the setting values 1 to 6 is stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102. (207SGSa053a). When a value other than 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as a set value, or when the set value is not stored in the RAM 102 (when the set value is cleared in 207SGSa020), the set value is set in the address F000 in the RAM 102. Is set to "1" (setting value is reset to "1"), and the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 (207SGSa053b). When any value 1 to 6 is stored in the RAM 102 as the set value (207SGSa053a; Y), the process proceeds to 207SGSa054 without executing the process of 207SGSa053b.

  In 207SGSa054, the CPU 103 sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed. Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa055), and it is determined whether the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa056; N), the processes of 207SGSa055 and 207SGSa056 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa056; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa057).

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa058), and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa059).

  Then, the CPU 103 sets the setting value changing flag (207SGSa061) and determines whether or not the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062). When the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is not operated (207SGSa062; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa065, and when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated (207SGSa062; Y), the address F001 of the RAM 102 is changed based on the operation of the setting changeover switch 207SG052. The contents are updated (207SGSa063).

  Specifically, when the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "1", the setting value "2" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "1" is set as the temporary setting value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "2", the setting value "3" which is one step more advantageous to the player than "2" is provisionally set. A value that is one larger than the setting value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, such as being stored as the setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, is stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as the borrowing setting. When the set value displayed on the display monitor 207SG029 is "6", "1" may be stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 as a temporary set value.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa064), and determines whether the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065).

  When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa065; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 207SGSa062 to 207SGSa065 to store a new provisional set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102 or the address stored in the address F001. The set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029.

  If the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa065 (207SGSa065; N), the CPU 103 clears the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) and displays the setting value (or temporary setting value) on the display monitor 207SG029. Ends (207SGSa067), and turns off all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa067a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa068, 207SGSa068a).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not a temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069). When the temporary setting value is not stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072, and when the temporary setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (207SGSa069; Y), further in the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 is different from the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070).

  When the value of the setting value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is the same as the value of the temporary setting value stored in the address F001 (207SGSa070; N), the process proceeds to 207SGSa072 and is stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102. If the value of the set value that is stored is different from the value of the temporary set value that is stored in address F001 (207SGSa070; Y), the temporary set value that is stored in address F001 in RAM 102 is stored in address F000. Store (207SGSa071), and proceed to 207SGSa072. That is, in the processing of 207SGSa071, the provisional set value is updated and stored in the RAM 102 as the actual set value.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa073), and ends the setting value change processing.

  FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the game control main processing. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first starts the lighting of all the segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (207SGSa101), and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator. The 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B start blinking (207SGSa102, see FIG. 11-27 (A)). Further, the CPU 103 selects only one of the segments forming the round indicator 207SG131 as a mode (a mode that is neither the big hit A, the big hit B nor the big hit C shown in FIG. 11-6) according to the setting value confirmation process. Is turned on (207SGSa103).

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa104), and sets a power cut detection process execution start waiting timer for waiting until the power cut detection process is executed (207SGSa105). ). Then, the value of the power cut detection process execution start wait timer is decremented by 1 (207SGSa106), and it is determined whether or not the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107). When the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has not timed out (207SGSa107; N), the processes of 207SGSa106 and 207SGSa107 are repeatedly executed, and the power cut detection process execution start wait timer has timed out (207SGSa107; Y). Executes power-off detection processing (207SGSa108). The power-off detection process (207SGSa108) is the same as the power-off detection process (207SGSa057) of the setting value changing process described above.

  After the power-off detection processing is executed, the CPU 103 starts displaying the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 207SG029 (207SGSa109) and via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to the management device such as the management computer of the game arcade (207SGSa110).

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111). When the lock switch 207SG051 is ON (207SGSa111; Y), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 207SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing the process of 207SGSa111. When the lock switch 207SG051 is OFF in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112), and the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are also displayed. All the segments that make up are turned off (207SGSa112a). Further, the CPU 103 ends the blinking of the right-handed lamp 207SG132, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, and the second hold indicator 207SG025B, and the lighting of the segments configuring the round indicator 207SG131 (207SGSa113, 207SGSa114).

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12 (207SGSa115), and ends the setting value confirmation processing.

  Thus, from the start of the set value change process and the set value confirmation process, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207Sg004B and the round display device 207SG131, and the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second By starting blinking of the hold indicator 207Sg025B and the right-handed lamp 207SG232, the player, the clerk of the game hall, or the like can change the set value or the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that confirmation is in progress.

  In the feature unit 207SG of another embodiment, when the setting value changing process or the setting value confirming process is started, the segment forming the round display 207SG131 is configured as a mode corresponding to the setting value changing process or the setting value confirming process. Although the mode in which only one of the LEDs is turned on is illustrated, the other invention is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the segments forming the round display 207SG131 is the jackpot A shown in FIG. 11-6. The lighting mode is not particularly limited as long as it does not correspond to any of the big hit B and the big hit C.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), at the start of the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing, the set value change processing or the set value confirmation processing is performed. As an aspect, a mode in which the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 are lit in the same mode is illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 are set as The lights may be turned on in different manners at the start of the value change process and the start of the set value confirmation process.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off (powered off) and then restarted, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened with the lock switch. Setting value change processing is executed by turning on the 207SG051 and the clear switch.

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (A) to 11-25 (E), the first display unit 207SG029A and the second display unit are turned off by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display using the 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (display of the base value shown in FIG. 11-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to another embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the setting value changing process is executed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the setting value changing process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. Then, when the setting changeover switch 207SG052 is operated in the state where the setting value is displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG029D as described above, the display on the fourth display unit 207SG029D is updated. When the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in this state, the numerical value displayed on the fourth display unit 207SG29D is set as a new set value.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once turned off (powered off) and then restarted, the lock switch 207SG051 is opened with the gaming machine frame 207SG003 open. The setting value confirmation process is executed by turning it on (clear switch is off).

  At this time, on the display monitor 207SG029, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (A), FIG. 11-25 (B) and FIG. 11-25 (E), by turning off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, The display using the display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D (the display of the base value shown in FIG. 11-17) ends. That is, the display monitor 207SG029 according to another embodiment uses different numbers of display units when the set value confirmation process is performed at the time of startup and when the base value is displayed after the startup is completed.

  Next, when the CPU 103 starts the set value confirmation process by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the display of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started on the fourth display unit 207SG029D. The display of the set value on the fourth display unit 207SG029D ends when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes ready for a game.

  11-24 is a flowchart showing the power failure detection process (207SGSa013c) executed by the CPU 103 in the set value change process and the set value confirmation process. In the set value confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is an input of a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped to a predetermined value or less (207SGS081). If the power-off signal is not input (207SGS081; N), the process is terminated, and if the power-off signal is input (207SGS081; Y), the backup data including the setting value information stored in the RAM 122 is specified. (207SGS082), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS083). Then, after creating the check data used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS084), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Incidentally, in the game control timer interrupt processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, as shown in FIG. After that, S21 to S27 (see FIG. 4) are executed.

  Next, a process executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described.

  FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (207SGS401) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and the CTC (counter / timer mounted on the effect control board 12). Circuit) register setting.

  Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control sets the command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from the main board 11 (207SGS403). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by 1 (207SGS404), and it is determined whether the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405). When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207 SGS 405; N), the processing of 207 SGS 404 and 207 SGS 405 is repeatedly executed and waits until the command reception waiting timer times out.

  When the command reception waiting timer has timed out (207SGS405; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hot start notification command has been received (207SGS406). When the hot start notification command is received (207SGS406; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to the power failure, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information in the player information input processing described later After the input of information is accepted, the information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. stored in the RAM 122 is cleared (207SGS407), and the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  When the hot start notification command is not received (207SGS406; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the cold notification command is received (207SGS408). When the cold notification command is received (207SGS408; Y), the player information and the performance information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots stored in the RAM 122 since the last time the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, the number of big hits, (207 SGS 409) while clearing the information including the number of times of super-reach, etc., and notifying that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared and that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for executing (RAM clear notification) is executed (207SGS410). In the RAM clear notification process, the image on the image display device 5 (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (A), the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 on the image display device 5 are cleared. A clerk of the game arcade that activated the pachinko gaming machine 1 after displaying a notification image 207SG005M1), emitting the game effect lamp 9, and outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is only necessary to notify that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the RAM clear notification process is executed, the process proceeds to 207SGS427.

  If the cold start notification command is not received (207SGS408; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the set value change start notification command or the set value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process is executed to inform that the operation is in progress (informing that the setting value is being changed) or that the setting value is being confirmed (informing that the setting value is being confirmed) (207SGS412).

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of the other embodiment, the image display device 5 is used as a notification during setting value change or a notification during setting value confirmation as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (B) and 11-36 (C). In, the display image 207SG005M2 indicating that the setting variable is being changed and the notification image 207SG005M3 indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting value changing state or the setting value confirmation state. The activated state generally means that the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is opened, and the clerk at the game hall or the like who changes or confirms the set value uses the display monitor 207SG029 mounted on the main board 11. It is in the state of being visually recognized. In other words, the set value change state and the set value confirmation state are states in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall who changes or confirms the set value. It is considered that the clerk at the game hall cannot judge from the display of the image display device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. Therefore, as the notification of the change of the set value or the notification of the change of the set value, the pachinko game machine can be used by a clerk of the game hall to change or check the set value by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R or the light emission of the game effect lamp 9. You may notify that 1 is starting in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state.

  The effect control CPU 120 also performs a first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) for checking the operation of the first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body initialization for performing the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322. The process (207SGS414) is executed. In the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is performed after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. Is executed (see FIG. 11-35).

  Here, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-33 and 11-34. FIG. 11-33 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing operation modes of the non-detection time operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 120. FIGS. 11-34 are explanatory views showing the control speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, and FIG. 11 (B) is an explanatory view showing the control speed in the non-detection operation control.

  The first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 are provided so as to be capable of reciprocating between their respective origin positions (first position) and effect positions (second position), and from the origin position to the effect position (first position). The forward movement to the second position) and the backward movement from the effect position to the origin position are actual operation modes of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 during variable display and the like.

  When the first movable body initializing process or the second movable body initializing process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 does not detect the detected portions of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332, that is, the movable body is movable. If the body 207SG321, 207SG322 has moved for some reason (for example, it has moved from the origin position during transportation or installation on a game island, or if the origin could not be restored during the previous operation (for example, when the performance is being performed, the motor is removed). When the movable body error (operation abnormality) such as the origin return of movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 cannot be confirmed or cannot operate due to adjustment, failure, catching etc.), it moved from the origin position due to the vibration of the game machine. The position other than the origin position (For example, a position indicated by a black circle corresponding to the non-detection operation control in FIG. 11-22, a predetermined position between the origin position and the united position), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. To do. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located away from the origin position, the only operation is moving the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 toward the origin position.

  Further, the effect control CPU 120 detects when the non-detection operation control is executed in the first movable body initialization process or the second movable body initialization process, or when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are detected by the origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332. If so, the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed. The operation control for actual operation confirmation is the same as the actual operation actually performed in the effect using the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 (for example, the movable body effect executed during the variable display).

  Next, the control speed set when the production control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control will be compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 11-34 (A) and 11-34 (B) are control speeds set by the production control CPU 120 to operate the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, and the movable body 207SG321. , 207SG322 is different from the actual operating speed. That is, for example, when operating the predetermined movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, even if the same control speed is set in one movement section and the other movement section between the origin position and the effect position, one movement section When the mode is different between the other moving section and the other moving section (for example, a section with a spring and a section without a spring, a straight section and a curved section), or when moving up and down even in the same moving section, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 The actual operating speed of may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, if there is a difference in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc., of the movable bodies 207SG321. , 207SG322 does not necessarily have the same actual operating speed. When a plurality of movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are operated by stepping motors having the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, the size, weight, and weight of each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322, When there are differences in the operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, etc., the actual operation speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are not necessarily the same.

  As shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), when performing the actual operation confirmation operation control, the production control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer in the set actual operation confirmation process data. The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, control is performed to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate and stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate and stop at the origin position. That is, in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for confirming that each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 can operate normally, the control speed of the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 is reduced between the origin position and the effect position. Change from high speed to low speed. That is, when performing the effect using each of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, the effect control CPU 120 has a minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and a maximum speed (high speed) that is a second speed that is faster than the minimum speed. Since each movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 is controlled to operate at a speed within the range of and, even when executing the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the minimum speed (low speed) that is the first speed and the minimum speed The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled so as to operate at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is even faster.

  That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322, and the control speeds are set to be the minimum speed and the maximum speed as the operating speeds. Will be set. In the following, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the minimum control speed, they operate at the minimum speed, and when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are operated based on the maximum control speed, the maximum speed is reached. It will be described as one that operates.

  Here, the control speed is set such that the operating speed of the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 during acceleration and deceleration is the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Further, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the movable body 207SG321, by controlling so as to be the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. The origin detection sensors 207SG331 and 207SG332 detect the detected portion after the 207SG322 is surely decelerated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (B), when the effect control CPU 120 executes the non-detection operation control, during the period in which the effect control CPU 120 moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. , The control is always performed so as to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. That is, the effect control CPU 120 causes the maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control to be less than or equal to the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (other In the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, based on the lowest minimum control speed among the control speeds set in the actual operation confirmation operation control, the minimum speed is always the same as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). The movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are controlled to operate.

  In this case, it is unclear how far the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are from the origin position. Therefore, when the movable bodies 207SG321 and 207SG322 are located near the origin position, the actual operation confirmation operation control is performed. If the movable body 207SG321, 207SG322 returns to the origin position when it is operated at the control speed at the time of acceleration, that is, at high speed, the origin detection sensors 207SG331, 207SG332 cannot reliably detect the detected portion or move from a short distance. Since the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. may be damaged by the impact when the bodies 207SG321, 207SG322 are returned to the origin position and their movement is restricted, the movable bodies 207SG321, 207SG322, etc. should be operated at the lowest speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control.

  11-29, after performing the first movable body initialization process (207SGS413) and the second movable body initialization process (207SGS413), the effect control CPU 120 sets the set value during the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321. Of the set value or the set value early change end flag indicating that the check of the set value is completed is set (207SGS415). If the set value early change end flag is not set (207SGS415; N), it is further determined whether or not a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command has been received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS 417. When the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS415; Y), the process of 207SGS416 is not executed and the process proceeds to 207SGS417.

  In 207SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the initialization (operation check) of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed (207SGS417). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed (207SGS417; N), the set value early change end flag is set and the process proceeds to 207SG412 (207SGS418), and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed. If it is (207SGS417; Y), it is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419). If the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has not been completed (207SGS419; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and if the initialization of the second movable body 207SG322 has been completed (207SGS419; Y), the setting value early change end It is determined whether the flag is set (207SGS420).

  In 207SGS420, when the set value early change end flag is set (207SGS420; Y), the set value early change end flag is cleared (207SGS421), and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), which is the same process as 207SGS413. And a second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) that is the same process as 207SGS414, and the first movable body initialization process (207SGS422), 207SGS414, and second movable body initialization process (207SGS423) are performed. It is determined whether the initialization (operation check) of the body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed (207SGS424). When the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is not completed (207SGS424; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS422, and the initialization of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is completed. (207SGS424; Y) advances to 207SGS427.

  As described above, regarding the processing of these 207SG412 to 207SG424, as shown in FIG. The setting value change notification and the setting value confirmation notification are started from the time when the gaming machine 1 is controlled to the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are performed. To execute. As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the second movable body initialization process is executed after the first movable body initialization process is completed, that is, the first movable body 207SG321. After the operation check is completed, the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is executed.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (A), the effect control CPU 120 sends a set value change end notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command to the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing. When received, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are finished after the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 and the second movable body 207SG322 is finished, the first movable body initialization process and the second The movable body initialization process is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), of the first movable body initializing process and the second movable body initializing process, only the first movable body initializing process is finished and the effect control is performed. When the CPU 120 for use receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, that is, the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is completed, but the operation check of the second movable body 207SG322 is still completed. When the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed in a state where there is no such state, the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are executed again after the second movable body initialization processing is completed. It is like this.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command at a timing when the first movable body initialization processing is not yet completed. In this case, that is, when the change of the set value and the confirmation of the set value are completed in a state where the operation check of the first movable body 207SG321 is not completed, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initializing process that are being executed are performed. Only the initialization processing is executed, and the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed again.

  If the setting value change start notification command and the setting value confirmation start notification command have not been received by the 207SGS 411 (207SGS411; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error specification command has been received (207SGS425). . When the error designation command is received (207SGS425; Y), the error notification processing (207SGS426) for performing the error notification indicated by the error designation command is executed, and when the error specification command is not received (207SGS425; N), , 207 SGS403.

  As an error notification in the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (D), the notification image 207SG005M4 corresponding to the error identified from the error designation command may be displayed on the image display device 5. Good.

  Thus, in the effect control main processing in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-30, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the player information (the player While clearing the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach, etc. from the input of information from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super-reach since the last start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) Etc.) and set value information (any one of the values “1” to “6” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the set value changing state or the setting confirming state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the set value information is already stored in the RAM 122. The existing setting value information is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, the information to be cleared from the RAM 122 is different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a set value confirmation state, or a set value change state. ing.

  Then, in 207 SGS 427, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and the image display device 5 receives the reception command. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the command is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-31, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a set value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a new set value. If it is not set, the display of the decorative design is started on the image display device 5 as the initial design with a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left. Further, if the received command is a setting value change end notification command, that is, if there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5 " The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in another embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5" Although the example in which the display of the decorative pattern is started by the combination of “5” and “6” is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, “6”). ) Is set, the decorative pattern is set as an initial design at a higher rate than a case where a setting value that is unfavorable to the player (for example, “1”) is set to “4”, “5”, and “6”. You may display in combination. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a set value that is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 207SG in another embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "4", "from the left as an initial symbol on the image display device 5" Although the example in which the display of the decorative pattern is started by the combination of “5” and “6” is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and a set value that is advantageous to the player (for example, “6”). ) Is set and a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “1”) is set, the initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different. In addition, the speaker 8L, 8R can be used depending on whether a setting value that is advantageous to the player (for example, "6") is set or a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player is set (for example, "1"). The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be different.

  Then, returning to FIG. 11-29, the CPU 120 for effect control sets “4” to the read-ahead restriction counter in order to restrict the execution of the read-ahead notice effect in the first four fluctuations (207SGS428). After that, the CPU 120 for effect control shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (207SGS429). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (ON), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (207SGS430) and executes the following processing.

  First, the effect control CPU 120 executes a start notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (207SGS431). In the activation notification processing, for example, it is determined whether or not the interruption is the first interruption from the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is specified which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command is received, The boot notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and the boot notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start notification process timer is started, the start notification process is executed at the next and subsequent interrupts to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the value of the start notification process timer and the start notification process table. Notification may be performed.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in another embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is one of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a set value change end notification command, and a set value confirmation end notification command. Depending on whether it is, the mode of activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-32, when a hot start notification command or a set value confirmation end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. When the set value is not set, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound A for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R are the same, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  When a cold start notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. In this case, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 60 seconds and the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the output sound B for 30 seconds. Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same, the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds is the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  That is, the specific control in another invention is that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R to 30. Performing the output of the output sound A for a second, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the production control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputs the speaker 8L, 8R for 30 seconds. This includes both performing the output of note B.

  Further, when the set value change end notification command or the set value change end notification command is received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the game effect lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds and the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds. The output sound C is output, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value change is completed). Although the emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C for 20 seconds from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 are the same, The light emission start timing of the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when a set value change end notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a hot start notification command or a cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. In contrast, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG of another embodiment, an example is shown in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a gaming machine management computer or a counter for each machine. As a start notification when the is started, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of this embodiment, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, and a setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partly common. Although there is illustrated a mode in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed in any case, other inventions are not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, or the setting confirmation state is started (for example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by the cold start, the image display device). When a message image is displayed at 5, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the setting changed, a signal is output from the external output terminal to the management device. May be etc.) way.

  In addition, the notification mode in each device that executes the startup notification may be different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start, cold start, setting change state, or setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are made to emit light, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting changed state. In this case, only some of the game effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be made to emit light.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is in an open state, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (for the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output only from some speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, the gaming machine frame 207SG003 is closed. In many cases, sound may be output from all the speakers 8L and 8R. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, while displaying a message image indicating that the setting is being changed such as “setting change” on the image display device 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started up at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 or the RAM 122 has been cleared, such as “RAM has been cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Furthermore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the external output terminals described above, the terminals for outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, as a setting value change notification, a period until the setting value change is completed (until a setting value change end notification command or a setting value designation command is received). A signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change over a period of time) to the management device, and after the setting value change is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal from the terminal corresponding to the error or RAM clear to the management device as a RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is commonly used in each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the activation notification process, the activation notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these pachinko gaming machines are not limited to this. The activation notification of 1 may be executed in the notification mode of 1 regardless of the received command. Further, the activation notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exemplified to be executed when any of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command is received. However, other inventions are not limited to this, and among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value confirmation end notification command, and the setting value change end notification command, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is received. You may provide the command which does not perform the starting notification of.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG in another embodiment, as an initialization effect in another invention, a different mode of activation notification is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or a pachinko game. An example is shown in which decorative patterns of different combinations are displayed on the image display device 5 in accordance with the command received when the machine 1 is activated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and these initializations are performed. The mode of the start notification as the effect and the combination of the decorative patterns may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part thereof may be the same.

  In the characteristic part 207SG in another embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or is started in a setting confirmation state, The activation notification may not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 11-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 executes power-off detection processing (207 SGS 432). In the power-off detection processing, as shown in FIG. 11-37, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (207SGS441). When the power-off signal is not input (207SGS441; N), the process is terminated, and when the power-off signal is input (207SGS441; Y), the setting value information and the player information stored in the RAM 122 are displayed. The included backup data is specified (207SGS442), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (207SGS443). Then, after creating check data to be used when restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (207SGS444), the process shifts to a loop process in which neither process is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  Returning to FIG. 11-29, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs processing such as setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis processing: 207SGS433). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 11-8) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control process processing (207SGS434). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, a production random number updating process (207SGS435) for updating the count value of the counter for generating a production random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number, a player information input process (207SGS436) for receiving an input of player information, and a game. Player information output processing (207SGS437) for outputting player information, and performance information total processing (207SGS438) for totaling performance information are executed. Then, it transfers to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the player's stick controller 31A or the push button 31B to operate a password (a password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and receives the input of the generated password) and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. as the player information stored every time the variable display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output processing, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and the two-dimensional code is generated. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a mobile terminal such as a smartphone and transmits the player information collected in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko game machine The cumulative player information in 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totaling process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time variation display, big hit game, and super reach are executed. To do.

  Next, an effect control process process in the characteristic unit 207SG of another embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-38, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the prefetching restriction counter is “0” (207SGS451). When the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is "0" (207SGS451; Y), after performing the read-ahead notice setting process (S161), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. Execute the process.

  If the value of the read-ahead regulation counter is one of "1" to "4" (207SGS451; N), it is further determined whether the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452). ). When the value of the effect control process flag is "0" or any of "2" to "7" (207SGS452; N), one of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) depending on the effect control process flag. When the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is "1" (207SGS452; Y), the value of the prefetching restriction counter is decremented by 1 (207SGS453), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177 (according to the effect control process flag). (See FIG. 7). By executing the processing of 207SGS451 to 207SGS453 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after starting, execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In addition, in the characteristic part 207SG in another embodiment, the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect changes four times. Although the form in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted over the display is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and the CPU 103 starts the winning a prize determination process based on the pachinko gaming machine 1 being activated. By not executing (see FIG. 5), execution of the pre-reading notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the other embodiment, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted over four variable displays. Although the form is illustrated, other inventions are not limited to this, and the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is set as the setting related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game becomes possible. Alternatively, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, the setting of the effect according to the RTC, and the like may be set to the factory default state.

Further, the invention 207SG shown below is also included in the other embodiments. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902, the fact that the setting state is set is notified only on the liquid crystal screen, and thus it is not possible to suitably notify that the setting state is set. There was a problem. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 207SG for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22),
When in the setting state, the information display unit displays a display that can be recognized as being in the setting state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that the setting state is set in the information display unit in which the variable display, which is an important display in the gaming machine, is notified, this feature is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
Set by the setting means when the confirmation condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the clear switch is OFF, and the lock switch 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON). To a confirmation state in which the set value can be confirmed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 11-23),
When in the confirmation state, the information display unit displays a display that allows the confirmation of the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), the CPU 103 is executing the set value confirmation process). If it is, the part that lights up all the segments that make up the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, since it is informed that it is in the confirmation state in the information display unit that executes the variable display that is an important display in the gaming machine, it is preferable. Notification can be made.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 207SG,
The display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is a display different from the display displayed on the information display section during the game (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-4 and 11-27. In, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B display mode in the case of deriving and displaying the variable display result, and the display mode in the case of the setting value change state or the setting value confirmation state, Different parts)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to accurately recognize that it is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 207SG,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the variable display section (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display). (A part that lights up all the segments that form the device 207SG004B)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this characteristic, it is possible to perform suitable notification on the variable display section.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 5 of invention 207SG,
The variable display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be turned on independently (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are each composed of eight segments. Part),
As a display capable of recognizing that the setting state or the confirmation state, all of the small display unit is turned on (for example, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B (The part that lights up all the constituent segments)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the game machine is in the setting state or the confirmation state.

Furthermore, as the gaming machine described in Means 6 of Invention 207SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that shoots a game medium into a gaming area (for example, a left gaming area 207SG002L and a right gaming area 207SG002R) to play a game,
The information display unit includes a firing direction notification unit (for example, a right-handed ramp 207SG132) that notifies the firing direction of the game medium in the game area,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the firing direction notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), (The part where the right-handed lamp 207SG132 blinks in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform suitable notification in the firing direction notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 7 of invention 207SG,
A reserve storage unit (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 5) capable of storing information regarding variable display as reserve information is provided.
The information display unit includes a hold display unit (for example, a first hold display 207SG025A and a second hold display 207SG025B) capable of displaying a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage unit,
When in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed on the hold display section (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (A), A gaming machine characterized by blinking all the segments composing the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B in the value change state or the set value confirmation state is described. For example, it is possible to make a suitable notification on the hold display unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
In the advantageous state, a special variable device (special variable winning ball device 7) capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can enter and a second state in which the game medium is less likely to enter than the first state,
The information display unit includes a number notification unit (for example, a round display 207SG131) that notifies the number of times the special variable device is in the first state in the advantageous state,
When it is in the setting state or the confirmation state, a display capable of recognizing the setting state or the confirmation state is displayed in the number-of-times notification unit (for example, as shown in FIG. (A portion where only one segment is lit among the segments constituting the round indicator 207SG131 in the value change state and the set value confirmation state)
A gaming machine characterized in that it is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform a suitable notification in the number-of-times notification unit.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 8 of invention 207SG,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing at least game information for the game control means to control the progress of the game,
Detection means (for example, a clear switch) capable of detecting the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
A state information storage unit (for example, an area of the address F002 of the RAM 102) capable of storing state information (for example, a RAM clear flag) capable of specifying the state of the gaming machine detected by the detection unit when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A first condition (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) including a special state (for example, a state in which the clear switch is ON) of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is satisfied. While the game is being performed, an initialization process for initializing the game information storage means accompanied by erasing the game information (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear process shown in FIG. 11-21A) is executed. Is feasible,
The second condition (for example, the clear switch is ON and the lock switch is included) that the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means is a special state (for example, the clear switch is ON) When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are ON), the setting change process for changing the set value can be executed, and the initial condition executed when the first condition is satisfied. Initialization processing common to the initialization processing can be executed based on the state information stored in the state information storage means (for example, a RAM clear processing and a setting value change processing can be executed).
Regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the state information is not erased (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (A), the RAM clear flag is cleared in the RAM clear process). (No part)
According to this feature, the initialization process can be made common when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. It is possible to accurately execute the initialization process based on the state information while preventing the storage capacity of the processing program from increasing.

Further, another embodiment includes invention 208SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that it is not possible to appropriately leave the occurrence of a predetermined error in the setting state. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 208SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
Controlled by the game control means, at least an information display unit including a variable display unit (eg, first special symbol display device 207SG004A and second special symbol display device 207SG004B) capable of performing variable display (for example, game information display Part 207SG200),
When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the clear switch, the lock switch 207SG051, and the open sensor 207SG090 are respectively ON), the setting value of the setting means is changed. The process shifts to a setting state in which the setting can be performed (for example, the state in which the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22),
When the specific condition is satisfied but a predetermined error occurs, a display capable of specifying that the predetermined error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-27 (B)). In the case, if an error more than the set value occurs, all segments constituting the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B blinks)
According to this feature, a predetermined error occurs even if a specific condition is satisfied in the variable display area in which the variable display, which is an important display in the game machine, is executed. Since it is notified by the display, it is possible to preferably notify that the predetermined condition has been met but a predetermined error has occurred.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 208SG,
The gaming machine is described in which the predetermined error is at least an error related to a storage area in which the set value is stored (for example, an error equal to or larger than the set value). According to this feature, the set value is set. It is possible to suitably notify that an error has occurred in the storage area in which is stored and the setting value needs to be reset.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 208SG,
If the power failure occurs before the new setting value changed in the setting state is settled, an error related to the storage area in which the setting value is stored occurs at the time of recovery from the power failure. Even if it does not exist, a display capable of specifying that an error has occurred is displayed in the variable display area (for example, even when the power is cut off during the setting change as shown in FIG. Part to blink all the segments that make up the special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B)
According to this feature, it is necessary to re-set the set value due to the occurrence of power interruption before the set value is confirmed without newly setting an error. It can be suitably notified.

Further, another embodiment includes invention 209SG shown below. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko gaming machine with a set value changing function, there is, for example, one described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. In addition, as a pachinko gaming machine provided with an information display means capable of displaying predetermined information about a game value to be given, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent No. 62099653. However, when the information display means described in Japanese Patent No. 6209653 is applied to the pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, a display unit for confirming the set value and an information display unit are provided. However, there is a problem that the cost of the gaming machine cannot be reduced by separately providing. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 209SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a game medium and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
A game value giving means for giving a game value based on a game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, a game ball wins a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, a general winning opening 10, a large winning opening, etc. The part where prize balls are paid out by doing),
It has a plurality of display units (for example, the first display unit 207SG029A to the fourth display unit 207SG029D), and has predetermined information (for example, shown in FIG. 11-17 (C)) regarding the game value provided by the game value providing means. An information display means (for example, display monitor 207SG029) capable of displaying a value),
Equipped with
The information display means can display setting value information capable of specifying the setting value set by the setting means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25, a pachinko game). When the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON and the clear switch is OFF when the machine 1 is started, the set value can be displayed in the set value confirmation state),
The number of the display units used is different between when the predetermined information is displayed and when the set value information is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-25, the base value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029). When it is displayed, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D are used, and when the set value is displayed on the display monitor 207SG029, the fourth display unit is displayed. (A part where only 207SG029D is used)
According to this feature, since the set value information is also displayed on the information display means capable of displaying the predetermined information regarding the game value, a display means for displaying the set value information is provided. Since it is not necessary to provide each separately, the cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 209SG,
The information display means is capable of displaying error information capable of specifying that an error has occurred in at least the storage area in which the setting value is stored (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (B), When the set value abnormality error occurs, “E.” is displayed on the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display unit 207SG029D),
The number of the display units used is the same when the predetermined information is displayed and when the error information is displayed (for example, FIG. 11-25 (A) and FIG. 11-26 (B)). As shown in FIG. 7, the first display unit 207SG029A, the second display unit 207SG029B, the third display unit 207SG029C, and the fourth display are used for displaying the base value on the display monitor 207SG029 and for displaying the occurrence of the abnormal error. Part 207SG029D) is described), and according to this feature, it is possible to notify that an error has occurred regarding the storage area in which the setting value is stored, and to set the setting value information. Can be easily recognized as different error information.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 3 of invention 209SG,
The display section is composed of a plurality of small display sections that can be turned on independently (for example, each of the first display section 207SG029A, the second display section 207SG029B, the third display section 207SG029C, and the fourth display section 207SG029D is 8 Part consisting of individual segments),
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detection means satisfies an initialization condition (for example, a clear switch is ON), the information display means is a small unit that constitutes each display unit All of the display parts are turned on to be in the all-lit display state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (A), the first display part 207SG029A, the second display part 207SG029B, the third display part 207SG029C, and the fourth display part). 207SG029D is a part that repeats all blinking and all extinguishing (flashing) of all the segments that make up the segment)
According to this feature, it is possible to confirm whether or not all of the small display units are normal.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in Means 4 of Invention 209SG,
Equipped with detection means (for example, clear switch) that can detect the state of the gaming machine when the power is turned on,
When the state of the gaming machine at power-on detected by the detecting means satisfies the predetermined condition, the information display means displays the set value information without being in the all-lit display state (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-22, when the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing, after executing 207SGSa015 and 207SGSa016, 207SGSa28 to 207SGSa030 are executed to display the base value on the display monitor 207SG029.)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, the setting value can be confirmed quickly.

Further, the invention 210SG shown below is also included in another embodiment. That is, conventionally, as a pachinko game machine that executes a confirmation operation of a movable body based on a change operation of a set value, for example, there is one described in JP-A-2017-189349. However, in the pachinko gaming machine described in JP-A-2017-189349, if the confirmation operation of the movable body is executed during the change of the set value, the operator may miss the confirmation operation. Therefore, it is conceivable to execute the confirming operation again after the setting value changing operation is completed. In this case, when the setting value changing operation is completed during the first movable body confirming operation, the changing operation is completed. There is a problem that a new movable body confirmation operation is started from the timing, and the movable body may perform an unintended operation. Therefore, when paying attention to the problem, as a gaming machine described in means 1 of invention 210SG that solves the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When a specific condition is established, the setting value can be set by the setting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, a clear switch and a lock switch are activated). When the 207SG051 and the open sensor 207SG090 are both ON, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process),
The control means is
When the confirmation operation control (for example, actual operation confirmation operation control) for causing the movable body to perform the confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed when the setting state is changed to It can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the effect control CPU 120 actually executes from the timing when the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received. Actual operation from the portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, and the timing at which the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command are received. (A portion that sequentially executes a first movable body initialization process and a second movable body initialization process including confirmation operation control),
If the setting state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the setting state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When the production control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, the production control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 2 of invention 210SG,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, a first movable body 207SG321 and a second movable body 207SG322) operably provided,
Control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing);
A setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the set value changing process shown in FIG. 11-22) capable of setting any set value among a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6 as set values). ,
With game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing) capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means,
Equipped with
When the confirmation condition is satisfied, the state shifts to a confirmation state in which the set value set by the setting means can be confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-20, clear when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up. When the switch is OFF and the lock switch 207SG051 and the release sensor 207SG090 are ON, the CPU 103 executes the set value confirmation processing),
The control means is
Confirmation operation control (for example, first movable body initialization processing and second movable body initialization processing) for causing the movable body to perform confirmation operation for confirming that the movable body can operate normally is performed. Can be executed at the time of shifting to the confirmation state and at the time of ending the confirmation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the effect control CPU 120 causes the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation From the timing of receiving the start notification command, a portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization processing including the actual operation confirmation operation control and the second movable body initialization processing, the set value change end notification command, and the set value confirmation (A portion that sequentially executes the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization process including the actual operation confirmation operation control from the timing of receiving the end notification command),
When the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation by the confirmation operation control when the confirmation state is entered, the confirmation operation control due to the completion of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, As shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), during the second movable body initialization process that is being executed based on that the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 receives the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command. (Part where 1 movable body initialization processing and 2nd movable body initialization processing are not executed)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 3 of invention 210SG,
The control means is
When the movable body is not located at a predetermined origin position, return operation control (for example, non-detection operation control) for performing a return operation to position the movable body at the origin position is performed by the confirmation operation. Can be done before executing control,
When the setting state or the confirmation state ends during the return operation, the confirmation operation control is executed after the end of the return operation (for example, first movable body initialization processing or second movable body initialization processing). In the above, the part that executes the actual operation confirmation operation control after ending the non-detection automatic operation control)
A game machine characterized by the above is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the movable body from performing an unintended operation.

Furthermore, as a game machine described in means 4 of invention 210SG,
The control means, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends while the movable body is performing the confirmation operation, when the operation state of the confirmation operation satisfies a predetermined condition, the setting state or the The confirmation operation control due to the end of the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), the production control CPU 120 has received a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the above, the first movable body initialization is newly performed after the second movable body initialization processing is executed. On the other hand, a portion in which the processing or the second movable body initialization processing is not executed) On the other hand, when the operation status of the confirmation operation does not satisfy the predetermined condition, it is confirmed that the setting state or the confirmation state is completed. Execution of operation control (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), the first movable body initialization based on the effect control CPU 120 having received the set value change start notification command and the set value confirmation start notification command. When the processing is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body is newly added after the completion of the second movable body initialization processing. (A portion that sequentially executes the initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine described in means 5 of invention 210SG,
A plurality of the movable bodies,
The control means is
The confirmation operation control can be sequentially executed for each of the movable bodies (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 sequentially executes the first face-carrying initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing),
When the setting state or the confirmation state is completed when the confirmation operation is not completed for all of the movable bodies, and when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is completed satisfies a predetermined condition, Confirmation operation control due to the end of the setting state or the confirmation state is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (C), the production control CPU 120 sends a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command. If the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the On the other hand, a portion in which the movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing are not executed) On the other hand, when the number of the movable bodies for which the confirmation operation is finished does not satisfy a predetermined condition, the set state is maintained. Executes the confirmation operation control for each of the movable bodies when the confirmation state is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (B), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the setting value change start notification command or the setting value). When the first movable body initialization processing based on the reception of the confirmation start notification command is completed and the set value change notification command or the set value confirmation notification command is received during the execution of the second movable body initialization processing, (A portion for newly executing the first movable body initialization processing and the second movable body initialization processing after the second movable body initialization processing is completed)
According to this feature, when the setting state or the confirmation state ends, the confirmation operation can be executed again according to the operation state of the confirmation operation.

  Although the characteristic portion 207SG in the other embodiments has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and there are changes and additions within the scope not departing from the gist of other inventions. Is also included in other inventions.

  For example, in the characteristic unit 207SG of the embodiment, the game information display unit 207SG200, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display 207SG025A, the second hold display 207SG025B, ordinary Although the figure display device 207SG020, the universal figure hold display device 207SG025C, the round display device 207SG131, the right striking lamp 207SG132, the probability variation lamp 207SG133, and the time saving lamp 207SG134 are exemplified, the other inventions are not limited to this. The game information display unit 207SG200 need only include the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B.

  In the characteristic unit 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process (setting value changing state) and the setting value checking process is being executed (setting value checking state). 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B exemplifies a mode of lighting in the same manner, but other inventions are not limited to this, and the CPU 103 is executing the setting value changing process. Depending on whether or not the setting value confirmation process is being executed, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B may be turned on or blinked in different modes. By doing this, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in either the set value change state or the set value confirmation state depending on the lighting mode or blinking mode of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B. You can easily tell if there is.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-mentioned embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, by lighting all the segments that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, The display mode (lighting mode) of the 1 special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B and the display mode when the first special symbol display device 207SG004A or the second special symbol display device 207SG004B derives and displays the variable display result. Although different forms have been illustrated, other inventions are not limited thereto, and display modes of the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state ( The lighting mode) is the first special symbol display device 207. G004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, if different from the display mode when the variable display result is derived and displayed, among these first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B constituting all segments It is not necessary to turn on some of the segments.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, in the setting value change state and the setting value confirmation state, all the segments and the round display device 207SG131 that constitute the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B are configured. The example in which one segment is turned on and all the segments composing the right-handed lamp 207SG132 and the first hold indicator 207SG025A and the second hold indicator 207SG025B are blinked have been exemplified, but other inventions are not limited to this. However, in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state, the one segment constituting the round display 207SG131 is turned on, the right-handed lamp 207SG132 is blinked, the first hold display 207SG025A and the second hold display 207SG025B are turned on. All constituent segments The flashing not execute, or may be executed only partially.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, in the set value changing state and the set value confirming state, only one of the segments configuring the round display 207SG131 is lit up, but another The invention is not limited to this, and if the combination does not correspond to the jackpot type shown in FIG. 11-6, the number of lit segments of the round indicator 207SG131 in the set value change state and the set value confirmation state is plural. May be

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the notification of the setting value abnormality error is executed using the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is exemplified, but other inventions are For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be individually provided with an LED for error notification, and the LED may be turned on or blinked to notify that a setting value error has occurred.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the display monitor 207SG029 for displaying the base value is displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been illustrated, but other inventions are not limited to this, and pachinko machines are not limited thereto. The gaming machine 1 may not include the display monitor 207SG029. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not provided with the display monitor 207SG029 in this way, a display means for displaying the set value (or the provisional set value) in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state may be newly provided. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the above-described embodiment, when the change of the set value or the confirmation of the set value is completed during the execution of the first movable body initialization processing or the second movable body initialization processing, the first movable body Depending on whether or not the initialization process is being executed, that is, whether or not the confirmation operation of the first movable body 207SG321 has already been completed, a new first movable body initialization process or a second movable body initialization process is performed. Although the mode of determining whether or not to execute is exemplified, other inventions are not limited to this, and whether or not to execute new first movable body initialization processing or second movable body initialization processing It may be determined according to the operating distance of each movable body, the remaining period required for the confirmation operation of each movable body, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, Although the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. The invention is not limited to this, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold display device 207SG025A, the second hold display device 207SG025B, round which constitutes the game information display unit 207SG200. display 07SG0131, the like right-handed lamp 207SG132, may have a structure in which pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the notification if during the game that the setting value is changed status and settings confirmation state (lit or flashing).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first reserved display device 207SG025A, the second reserved display device 207SG025B, which constitute the game information display portion 207SG200, Although the round display 207SG0131, the right-handed lamp 207SG132, etc. are set to be different from those in the game, the pachinko gaming machine 1 notifies the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value changing state or the set value confirming state. The invention is not limited to this, and the "mode different from that during game" may include different blinking periods, brightness, different emission colors of each segment, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic part 207SG of the above-described embodiment, the first movable body initialization process and the second movable body initialization are performed from the time when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command. As the processing, the mode in which the non-detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body are executed has been exemplified, but the other inventions are not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 starts changing the set value. From the time when the notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, the non-detection operation control of each movable body is executed, and the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command Therefore, the actual operation confirmation operation control of each movable body may be executed.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 207SG of the embodiment, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first holding display device 207SG025A, the second holding display device 207SG025B, which configures the game information display portion 207SG200, Although the round display 207SG131 and the right-handed lamp 207SG132 are turned on or blinked to notify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, another invention is not limited to this. Not the one, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the set value change state or the set value confirmation state, the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold display Vessel 207SG025B, LA Command indicator 207SG131, may be provided with written description of the lighting or blinking of the right-handed light 207SG132 is executed at a predetermined position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (e.g., the vicinity of the gaming information display unit 207SG200). By doing this, a clerk of the game hall, etc. who is not familiar with the pachinko gaming machine 1 has the first special symbol display device 207SG004A, the second special symbol display device 207SG004B, the first hold indicator 207SG025A, the second hold. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of lighting or blinking of the display 207SG025B, the round display 207SG131, and the right hitting lamp 207SG132 as a failure of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Incidentally, in the game control main processing of the characteristic portion 207SG of another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or in 207SGSa021 the set value is changed. Although the mode in which the RAM clear process (207SGSa009) is executed after clearing the middle flag is illustrated, the other invention is not limited to this, and the other invention is not limited to this. In the RAM clear processing, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 207SGSa008 (207SGSa008; Y) or after the setting value changing flag is cleared in 207SGSa021, it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014. Place (207SGSa014; Y) to be executed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 10F)
Next, the characteristic portion 10F will be described. The characteristic unit 10F is characterized in that a game stop start process and a game stop end process are added to the above-described set value change process and set value confirmation process.

  FIG. 12-1 is a flowchart showing the setting value changing process in the characteristic unit 10F. In FIG. 12-1, the same processes as those in FIG. 11-22 are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. In the process of FIG. 11-20, the RAM clear process is executed in the process of 207SGa009 before the setting change process (207SGa013b) is executed. Therefore, at the stage of the setting change processing (207SGa013b), no information regarding the game remains in the storage area. However, the RAM clear process (207SGa009) may be executed when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 207SGSa014 (207SGSa014; Y). As a result, the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the characteristic unit 10F, description will be made on the assumption that the RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process. In the setting value change process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa051). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 11-22 is executed.

  Further, the CPU 103 executes the game stop termination process after executing the process of clearing the setting value changing flag (207SGSa066) (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value (or the provisional set value) on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa067). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 11-22 is executed.

  FIG. 12-2 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing in the characteristic unit 10F. 12-2, the same processing as that in FIG. 11-23 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and description thereof will be omitted. In the set value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first executes a game stop start process (10FS001). Details of the game stop start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 12-3. This game stop start processing is common to the game stop start processing of FIG. 12-1. After the game stop start processing, lighting of all the segments that form the first special symbol display device 207SG004A and the second special symbol display device 207SG004B is started (207SGSa101). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 11-23 is executed.

  Further, when the lock switch 207SG051 is turned off in 207SGSa111 (207SGSa111; N), the CPU 103 executes the game stop ending process (10FS002). Details of the game stop ending process will be described with reference to FIG. 12-4. This game stop ending process is the same process as the game stop ending process of FIG. 12-1. After the game stop ending process, the display of the set value on the display monitor 207SG029 is ended (207SGSa112). Thereafter, the same processing as the processing shown in FIG. 11-23 is executed.

(About various timers)
Next, the game stop start processing will be described. During the game, a plurality of timers measure time and period relating to the game. When the game is stopped, the CPU 103 stops counting the plurality of timers. The plurality of timers will be described in order. The attacker opening time timer is a timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 having the special winning opening. The CPU 103 uses an attacker opening time timer to measure the time from when the special winning opening door is opened to when it is closed. The inter-round interval period timer is a timer for measuring the interval period between rounds during the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the end of a round to the start of the next round by the inter-round interval period timer.

  The V-lid opening time timer controls the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished to a certain-variable state based on passing a certain switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and the certain switch ( It is a timer for measuring the opening time of the V lid, which is provided in front of the sensor for detecting the V probability change) and is controlled to the open state and the closed state. In the V-probability variation gaming machine, the V lid is opened in a predetermined round of a plurality of rounds. Such an area where the V lid is in an open state is called a V winning area. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the V lid is opened to when it is closed by the V lid opening time timer. The V passage waiting time timer is a timer for measuring the time of V winning that determines that a game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is valid. The CPU 103, after the special winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7 has changed from the open state to the closed state, has passed through a predetermined switch with a game ball (a special winning opening is given to the special winning opening just before the closing of the special winning opening door). A game ball that has passed through the switch is also determined as a V winning within the valid period. The CPU 103 measures the valid period of the V winning, in which the V winning is determined to be valid, by the V passage waiting time timer.

  The electric-chu open time timer is a timer for measuring the open time when the electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wings, which is the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory), is controlled to the open state. . The variable winning ball device 6B changes between a closed state and an open state, but the CPU 103 measures the time from the open state of the variable winning ball device 6B to the closed state by the electric Chu opening time timer. .

  The special figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the special symbol. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the end of the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol fluctuation time timer. The universal figure variation time timer is a timer for measuring the execution time of the variable display of the ordinary symbols. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the end of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal variable time timer.

  The fanfare time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the fanfare effect is executed, which is a period for notifying that the big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit. The fanfare period is a period in which the fanfare production as a production operation for notifying the start of the big hit game state is executed after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. The CPU 103 uses the fanfare time timer to measure the time from the start of the fanfare effect to the end of the fanfare effect.

  The ending time timer is a timer for measuring a period during which the ending effect is executed, which is a period for notifying the end of the big hit when the big hit ends. The ending period is a period in which the big hit ending process is executed, and is a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state. The CPU 103 measures the time from the start of the ending effect to the end of the ending effect by the ending time timer.

  The CPU 103 includes a special figure fluctuation stop period timer, a universal figure fluctuation stop period timer, and the like as timers other than the above timers. The special figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.5 seconds) from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the special symbol is derived and displayed by the special figure fluctuation stop period timer until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. The universal figure fluctuation stop period timer is a timer for measuring the time (for example, 0.4 seconds) from when the variable display of the normal symbol is derived and displayed until the next variable display of the normal symbol is started. The CPU 103 measures the time from when the variable display of the ordinary symbol is derived and displayed by the universal figure fluctuation stop period timer until the next variable display of the ordinary symbol is started.

(Game stop start processing)
Next, the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 12-3 is a flowchart showing the game stop start processing in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop start processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is operating (10FS010). In 10FS010, if the attacker release time timer is in operation (10FS010; Y), the attacker release time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process is ended. If the attacker opening time timer is not operating (10FS010; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is operating (10FS011). In 10FS011, if the inter-round interval period timer is in operation (10FS011; Y), the in-round interval period timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not operating (10FS011; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is operating (10FS012). In 10FS012, if the V lid opening time timer is in operation (10FS012; Y), the V lid opening time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the V lid opening time timer is not operating (10FS012; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is operating (10FS013). In 10FS013, if the V passage waiting time timer is in operation (10FS013; Y), the V passage waiting time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  When the V passage waiting time timer is not in operation (10FS013; N), it is determined whether or not the power cable open time timer is in operation (10FS014). In 10FS014, if the power-chu open time timer is operating (10FS014; Y), the power-chu open time timer that is operating is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not operating (10FS014; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is operating (10FS015). In 10FS015, if the special figure fluctuation time timer is in operation (10FS015; Y), the special figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not in operation (10FS015; N), it is determined whether the general figure variation time timer is in operation (10FS016). In 10FS016, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is operating (10FS016; Y), the universal figure fluctuation time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not operating (10FS016; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is operating (10FS017). In 10FS017, if the fanfare time timer is in operation (10FS017; Y), the fanfare time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not operating (10FS017; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is operating (10FS018). In 10FS018, if the ending time timer is in operation (10FS018; Y), the ending time timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not in operation (10FS018; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is in operation as another timer (10FS019). In 10FS019, if the other timer is in operation (10FS019; Y), the other timer in operation is stopped (10FS020), and the process ends. If the other timers are not operating (10FS019; N), the other process (10FS021) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS021) includes the following processing. For example, the process of invalidating the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, the process of invalidating various sensors provided in the starting port, the general winning opening 10, the out port, and the passage gate 41, the process of invalidating the detection of various errors, The process of invalidating the payout of prize balls is included. By the other process (10FS021), various processes are invalidated and the game is not normally executed.

(Game stop end process)
Next, the game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F will be described. FIG. 12-4 is a flowchart showing a game stop ending process in the characteristic unit 10F. First, in the game stop ending process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030). In 10FS030, if the attacker opening time timer is stopped (10FS030; Y), the stopped attacker opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the attacker release time timer is not stopped (10FS030; N), it is determined whether the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031). In 10FS031, if the inter-round interval period timer is stopped (10FS031; Y), the stopped inter-round interval period timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the inter-round interval period timer is not stopped (10FS031; N), it is determined whether the V-lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032). In 10FS032, if the V lid opening time timer is stopped (10FS032; Y), the stopped V lid opening time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process is ended. If the V lid opening time timer is not stopped (10FS032; N), it is determined whether the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033). In 10FS033, if the V passage waiting time timer is stopped (10FS033; Y), the stopped V passage waiting time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the V passage waiting time timer is not stopped (10FS033; N), it is determined whether the power cable open time timer is stopped (10FS034). In 10FS034, if the power-chu open time timer is stopped (10FS034; Y), the active power-chu open time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the power switch opening time timer is not stopped (10FS034; N), it is determined whether the special figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS035). In 10FS035, if the special figure change time timer is stopped (10FS035; Y), the stopped special figure change time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the special figure variation time timer is not stopped (10FS035; N), it is determined whether the universal figure variation time timer is stopped (10FS036). In 10FS036, if the universal figure fluctuation time timer is stopped (10FS036; Y), the suspended universal figure fluctuation time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the universal figure fluctuation time timer is not stopped (10FS036; N), it is determined whether the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037). In 10FS037, if the fanfare time timer is stopped (10FS037; Y), the stopped fanfare time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends.

  If the fanfare time timer is not stopped (10FS037; N), it is determined whether the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038). In 10FS038, if the ending time timer is stopped (10FS038; Y), the stopped ending time timer is activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the ending time timer is not stopped (10FS038; N), it is determined whether or not a timer such as a special figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped as another timer (10FS039). In 10FS039, if the other timers are stopped (10FS039; Y), the stopped other timers are activated (10FS040), and the process ends. If the other timers are not stopped (10FS039; N), the other process (10FS041) is executed, and then the process ends.

  Here, the other processing (10FS041) includes the following processing. For example, a process for enabling the firing of the ball hitting handle 30, a process for enabling various sensors provided in the starting opening, the general winning opening 10, the out opening, and the passage gate 41, a process for enabling the detection of various errors, It includes processing for validating the payout of prize balls. By the other process (10FS041), various processes are validated and the game is normally executed.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 controls the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state. Of the attacker release time timer is restarted based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period during which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the open state is subtracted in the setting confirmed state, and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state becomes Based on the completion, the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the interval period between rounds is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. You can

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled during the valid period of V winning, and confirms the setting. Based on the termination of the state, the measurement of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the valid period of the V winning is subtracted in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the open state, and thus the valid period of the electric-chu open time timer And stops the time measurement of the valid period of the power-chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the variable winning ball device 6B is in the enterable state in the setting confirmed state. It is possible to prevent that.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the special symbol variable display is controlled to the setting confirmation state while being executed. Is stopped, and the measurement of the valid period of the special figure variation time timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the progress of the game by executing the variable display of the special symbol in the setting confirmation state. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 12-1 to FIG. 12-4, the CPU 103 measures the effective period of the general-use variable time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the ordinary symbols is executed. And restarts the measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variable time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing so, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. be able to.

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the fanfare effect is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer is restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the fanfare effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. .

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the ending confirmation is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the ending effect is being executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, the counting of the valid period of the ending time timer is restarted. By doing so, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately and prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the ending effect being executed and the game progressing in the setting confirming state. .

  As shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the CPU 103 is based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and before the next variable display is started. The clocking of the period of the fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and the clocking of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state. By doing this, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the game proceeds by subtracting the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped in the setting confirmation state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portion 10F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and other changes or additions may be made without departing from the scope of the invention. Included in the invention. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 10F is demonstrated.

  The gaming machine (so-called first-class gaming machine) that shifts to the big hit game state based on the variable display result of the special symbol and the decorative symbol has been described, but the special variable winning ball device (so-called accessory) provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V-winning) a special winning port (V winning port) inside, and the first and second types It may be applied to a gaming machine (one-two mixing machine) in which and are combined. When the start winning to the second start winning opening is detected, the big hit determination is executed, and when the result of the big hit is determined, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the big hit display result becomes the big hit game. The game control similar to the jackpot based on the start winning to the first start winning opening is executed, such as being controlled to the state. On the other hand, when the judgment result is not a big hit, the small hit judgment is executed, and when the judgment result is the small hit, the variable display of the second special figure is executed and the small hit display result becomes the small hit game. The special variable winning ball device for small hits is controlled to be open for a predetermined time. When the game ball is received by the special variable winning ball device for the small hit in the small hitting game state, and the game ball enters the special winning hole (V area) and is detected by the predetermined switch, the variable for the big hit The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes the second type big hit game control in which the prize winning ball device is opened for a predetermined number of rounds and becomes a big hit game state.

  In such a one-and-two-mixer, a small hit time timer may be provided for measuring an effective period in which a game ball that has entered the special winning opening (V area) is determined to be effective. The CPU 103 determines that the game balls that have passed the predetermined switch after the special variable winning ball device has passed from the open state to the closed state by the small hit time timer are also within the valid period. The CPU 103 uses a small hit time timer to measure a period during which the winning of the special winning opening is determined to be valid. Then, the CPU 103 stops measuring the effective period of the small hit time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting check state when in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state. The counting of the effective period of the small hit time timer may be restarted. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the small hitting gaming state in the setting confirming state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, various controls are executed in the setting confirmation state, but as shown in FIGS. 12-1 to 12-4, the same control may be executed in the setting change state. Good. For example, the CPU 103 stops clocking of various timers based on the control of the setting change state when the player is in an advantageous state, etc., and various timers based on the end of the setting change state. You may make it restart the time measurement of.

  The control of the timer may be changed depending on whether the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result or the off display result. Specifically, if the variable display of the special symbol is the big hit display result, stop the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled, and based on the fact that the setting confirmation state has ended. If the special display variable time timer is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol results in a display error, the special figure variable time timer may not be stopped even if the setting confirmation state is controlled. . In this way, for the jackpot display result that is advantageous for the player, the timer is stopped to give a disadvantage to the player, but the timer is stopped because the deviated display result is not disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from stopping. As a control method, it may be determined whether the current game state is a big hit display result or a deviant display result before the game stop start process accompanying the set value confirmation process is executed. Then, if the setting confirmation is executed during the execution of the variable display of the deviation display result, during the execution of the variable display of the deviation, the symbol stop period is reached without stopping the timekeeping of the special figure variation time timer. At this time, the special figure fluctuation stop period timer may be stopped.

  The timer control may be changed depending on whether the set value is advantageous to the player or not. For example, when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is advantageous to the player, various timers are stopped, but when the setting confirmation state is set when the setting value is unfavorable to the player, various timers are set. It may not be stopped.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 10F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 10F includes the following inventions regarding the above-described characteristic portion 10F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to move to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 10F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) capable of setting any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player in accordance with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
State control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times,
A variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. Based on that the CPU 103 restarts the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker release time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on the fact, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the time measurement of the period between rounds interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium having entered the specific region,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, a V winning valid period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a V winning valid period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state of the valid period. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives and displays the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time with a power-chu open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure variation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 for timing by a universal figure variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information is further provided.
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
And a start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that times the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, a special timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the valid period based on the control in the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 11F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 11F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to move to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 11F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) capable of setting any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player in accordance with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
State control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives and displays the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time by a power tube opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means is in an enterable state,
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times,
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. Based on that the CPU 103 restarts the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker release time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on the fact, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the time measurement of the period between rounds interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium having entered the specific region,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, a V winning valid period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a V winning valid period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state of the valid period. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure variation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 for timing by a universal figure variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information is further provided.
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Start notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
And a start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that times the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, a special timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the valid period based on the control in the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 12F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 12F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to move to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 12F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the specific display is derived as a result. hand,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) capable of setting any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player in accordance with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
State control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
And variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that clocks with a special figure variation time timer) that times the execution period of the variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol),
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure variation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times,
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. Based on that the CPU 103 restarts the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker release time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The system further comprises stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures a period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the fact that the time measurement is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is specially determined based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game proceeds. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on the fact, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the time measurement of the period between rounds interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium having entered the specific region,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, a V winning valid period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a V winning valid period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state of the valid period. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives and displays the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time with a power-chu open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
Further, a normal variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 for timing by a universal figure variable time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the normal identification information is further provided.
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
And a start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that times the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, a special timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the valid period based on the control in the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation of Invention Regarding Characteristic Section 13F)
The following inventions may be included as the characteristic portion 13F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values based on a setting change operation and can execute control of an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on the set setting value. It was In such a pachinko gaming machine, in the setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value, it is possible to move to the next processing only when all the main processing being executed is completed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). reference).

  However, in the case of the gaming machine as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, when it is desired to confirm the setting immediately, it is necessary to wait until all the processes being executed are completed, and the setting confirmation work is appropriately executed. I couldn't. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic part 13F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of identification information and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is derived. ,
The setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the setting value changing process) capable of setting any one of the setting values (for example, the setting values 1 to 3) of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage for the player in accordance with the setting changing operation. Part to be executed)
State control means capable of controlling to a setting confirmation state capable of confirming which setting value is set (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the setting variable value confirmation processing);
An ordinary variable display means (for example, CPU 103) for variably displaying the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and deriving a display result based on that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41).
An ordinary variable display timing means (for example, the CPU 103 which measures the variable time of the universal figure timer) for measuring the execution period of the variable display of the ordinary identification information,
The ordinary variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the ordinary identification information is being performed, and based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. To restart the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the effective period of the universal figure variation time timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, Based on the end of the setting confirmation state, restart the clocking of the validity period of the universal figure variable time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the variable identification information is normally displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
A variable winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7) that changes between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous for the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous for the player.
A predetermined game execution means (for example, CPU 103) capable of executing a predetermined game (for example, a round) for changing the variable winning device from the second state to the first state during the advantageous state a plurality of times,
And a variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures an attacker opening time timer) for measuring a period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state,
The variable winning timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable winning device is changing to the first state, and the setting confirmation state is ended. Based on that the CPU 103 restarts the time measurement of the period (for example, the CPU 103 measures the period of the attacker opening time timer based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the setting confirmation state while changing to the open state). And restarting the time measurement of the attacker release time timer period based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and in the setting confirmation state, the period during which the variable winning device is changed to the first state is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the player Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantage.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The system further comprises stop timing means (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variable stop period timer) that measures a period from when the variable display of the identification information is stopped to when the next variable display is started,
The stop timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state after the variable display of the identification information is stopped until the next variable display is started, and the setting confirmation state is Based on the fact that the time measurement is restarted based on the end (for example, the CPU 103 is specially determined based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped until the next variable display is started. (Time stop of the period of the figure fluctuation stop period timer is stopped, and time counting of the period of the special figure fluctuation stop period timer is restarted based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the period in which the next variable display is started after the variable display of the identification information is stopped in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game proceeds. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the loss.

(4) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
Further, a predetermined game time counting means (for example, a CPU 103 that counts by a round interval time period timer) for measuring a period (for example, a round interval period) from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game,
The predetermined game timekeeping means stops the timekeeping of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on the fact, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 stops the time measurement of the period of the inter-round interval period timer based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state in the inter-round interval period, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the time measurement of the period between rounds interval period timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and in the setting confirmation state, the period from the end of the predetermined game to the start of the next predetermined game is subtracted and the game progresses, so that the game progresses. It is possible to prevent the person from being disadvantaged.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above,
A specific area (for example, a V winning area) provided in the variable winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) for controlling to a special state (for example, probability variation state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is high based on the game medium having entered the specific region,
Specific timing means for measuring an effective period (for example, a V winning valid period) for determining that the game medium that has entered the specific area is valid after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a V winning valid period). For example, a CPU 103) that counts with a V passage waiting time timer is further provided,
The specific timing means stops timing of the valid period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state of the valid period. Restarting the timekeeping (for example, the CPU 103 stops the timekeeping of the valid period of the V passage waiting time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting confirmation state during the valid period of the V winning, and based on the completion of the setting confirmation state. Restarts the measurement of the effective period of the V passage waiting time timer).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and the player is disadvantaged because the effective period when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation state is subtracted and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
A normal variable display means (for example, CPU 103) that variably displays the normal identification information (for example, a normal symbol) and derives and displays the display result based on the game medium having entered the predetermined area (for example, the passage gate 41). ,
When the display result of the normal variable display means becomes a predetermined display result (for example, a universal figure), a normal variable winning means (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter for a predetermined period (for example, an open state) , A variable winning ball device 6B),
And a normal variable winning timekeeping means (for example, a CPU 103 which measures time with a power-chu open time timer) for measuring a period during which the normal variable winning means can enter.
The normal variable winning award timing means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state when the normal variable winning award means is in an enterable state, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on this, the time measurement of the period is restarted (for example, the CPU 103 determines that the effective period of the power-chu open time timer is based on the fact that the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to the setting confirmation state when it is in the open state. Stop the time measurement, and restart the time measurement of the valid period of the electric Chu open time timer based on the end of the setting confirmation state).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to confirm the setting immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the game progresses when the normal variable winning means is in the enterable state in the setting confirming state. Can be prevented.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
Variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol), when the specific display result (for example, big hit display result) is derived, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, big hit game state),
A variable display timing unit (for example, the CPU 103 that counts by a special figure variation time timer) for timing the execution period of the variable display of the identification information is further provided,
The variable display timing means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the variable display of the identification information is being executed, and the period based on the termination of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the effective period of the special figure variation time timer based on the fact that it is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, and confirms the setting). Based on the end of the state restarts the valid period of the special figure variation time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is disadvantaged because the identification information is variably displayed in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
Start notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes a start notification effect (for example, fanfare effect) that notifies the start of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
And a start notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a fanfare time timer) that measures the execution period of the start notification effect.
The start notification effect timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the start notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops counting the effective period of the fanfare time timer based on the fact that the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting confirmation state when the fanfare production is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the measurement of the valid period of the fanfare time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the start notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
End notification effect execution means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control) that executes an end notification effect (for example, ending effect) that notifies the end of the advantageous state for a predetermined period.
An end notification effect timing unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures an ending time timer) that times the execution period of the end notification effect,
The end notification effect timekeeping means stops timing of the period based on being controlled to the setting confirmation state while the end notification effect is being executed, and the period based on the end of the setting confirmation state. (For example, the CPU 103 stops the measurement of the valid period of the ending time timer based on the fact that the setting confirmation state is controlled when the ending effect is being executed, and the setting confirmation state ends. Based on that, restart the timing of the valid period of the ending time timer).

  According to such a configuration, the setting can be confirmed immediately, and the player is prevented from being disadvantaged due to the completion notification effect being executed in the setting confirmation state and the game progressing. be able to.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, small hitting game state) based on the variable display result becoming a special display result (for example, small hitting display result)
A special winning device (for example, a special variable winning ball device) that allows the game medium to enter in the special state,
Further provided with a special area (for example, a special winning opening) which is provided in the special winning device and into which a game medium can enter,
Based on the game medium entering the special area, it is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state),
In a special state, a special timekeeping unit (for example, a CPU 103 that measures a small hit time timer) for measuring an effective period for determining that the game medium that has entered the special area is valid,
The special timekeeping means stops the time measurement of the valid period based on the control in the setting confirmation state in the special state, and restarts the time measurement of the valid period based on the end of the setting confirmation state (for example, The CPU 103 stops measuring the valid period of the small hit time timer on the basis of being controlled to the setting check state while in the small hit game state, and based on the end of the setting check state, Restart the small hit time timer valid period).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to immediately confirm the setting, and it is possible that the player is disadvantaged because the control is executed in the special state in the setting confirmation state and the game progresses. Can be prevented.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 40F)
Next, the characteristic portion 40F will be described. The characteristic unit 40F has a feature regarding the processing of the effect control command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Noise may be generated due to static electricity or the like during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In such a case, the effect control command may be unintentionally transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The processing when such an irregular command is received will be described below.

  FIG. 13-1 is a diagram exemplifying effect control commands in the characteristic unit 40F in another embodiment. In FIG. 13-1, some of the effect control commands are added to the list of effect control commands shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) described above. The added commands are command F1XXH and command F2XXH. These commands are effect control commands indicating the contents of the winning determination results such as the jackpot type determination and the variation pattern type determination at the time of the start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Of these, the command F1XXH is a symbol designating command that indicates whether or not a big hit is included in the winning determination results, and the determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, the command F2XXH is a variation type command that indicates the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result.

  Various effect control commands shown in FIG. 13A are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 at a predetermined timing by the CPU 103. Upon receiving various effect control commands, the effect control CPU 120 executes various processes. A part of the various processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 based on the effect control command will be described.

(About processing based on fluctuation pattern specification command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 on the basis of the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing variation display of the decorative pattern to be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 may be provided with a constant small symbol of a reduced decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. In such a case, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to operate based on the reception of the variation pattern designation command, thereby performing the variation display of the constantly displayed small symbols.

(About processing based on the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command)
As a variable display pattern, a decorative symbol, a special symbol, and a fourth symbol may be provided as a fourth symbol following the ordinary symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first and second special symbols) is changing, for example, it is fluctuated by a certain operation in a mode that is always visible in a display device such as the image display device 5. Is displayed. By the variable display of the fourth symbol, the effect such that the effect contents including the variable display of the decorative symbol disappears from the screen for a moment is performed, or the movable body displays all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if it is difficult to recognize the decorative pattern, such as when an effect such as shielding is performed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display. Based on the reception of the first variation start command, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 to perform variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Further, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second variation start command.

(About processing based on the designated command during the opening of the special winning opening)
During the big hit game, for example, a round game for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to an open state (first state) advantageous to the player is executed 15 times. During the round game, the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the closed state (second state), which makes it difficult for the gaming ball to enter the special winning opening. The effect control CPU 120 controls the special variable winning ball device 7 to the open state based on the reception of the special winning opening opening designation command. Moreover, the CPU 120 for effect control updates the display of the number of rounds in the big hit game state by operating the image display device 5 based on the reception of the special winning opening open designation command.

(Regarding the processing based on the first start mouth prize designation command and the second start mouth prize designation command)
The effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the first start opening winning award designation command, whereby the first hold information stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. Display the hold display corresponding to. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the second start opening winning award designation command, so that the effect control command reception buffer stored in the RAM 122 stores the second result. Display the hold display corresponding to the hold information.

(About processing based on symbol designating command, variation type designating command)
Based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect or a winning pending change effect. The winning flash effect is an effect of causing a lamp provided around the first start opening to emit light when a start winning occurs. The effect control CPU 120 performs the lottery for the winning flash effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the lamp emits light in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation. Concretely, the production control CPU 120 emits red light for those with a high expectation of big hits, and white light for those with a low expectation of hits. Is controlled so that the lamp does not emit light. Also, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning flash effect. In addition, you may control not to output sound only by light emission.

  The winning-time hold change effect is an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed when the start winning occurs to a mode different from the normal mode. The effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery for a winning change hold effect based on the jackpot expectation based on the hold information by the symbol designating command or the variation type designating command. When the lottery is won, the hold display at the time of winning is displayed in a mode different from the normal mode. Specifically, the hold display is displayed in red, green, and blue in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation, and the hold display is displayed in white in the normal mode in the case of being missed in the lottery or out fluctuation without reach. . Further, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a sound according to the degree of expectation together with the winning pending change effect. In addition, you may control not to output a sound only by a hold change.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to emit light based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the symbol designating command and the variation type designating command, thereby executing the winning-pending change production. Only one of the winning flash effect and the winning pending change effect may be executed. Further, at the time of winning, the effect indicating the degree of expectation may be executed only by the output of the sound.

  Next, the effect control main process executed in the characteristic unit 40F will be described. FIG. 13-2 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing in the characteristic unit 40F. In FIG. 13B, the same processes as those in FIG. In FIG. 13-2, the processing relating to 207SGS413 to 207SGS415 and 207SGS417 to 207SGS424 in FIG.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a setting value change start notification command or a setting value confirmation start notification command has been received (207SGS411). When the setting value change start notification command or the setting value confirmation start notification command is received (207SGS411; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting value changing state or the setting value checking state, the setting value is changed. A set value related informing process is executed to inform that the operation is in progress (informing that the setting value is being changed) or that the setting value is being confirmed (informing that the setting value is being confirmed) (207SGS412). In the set value related notification process, a notification image indicating that the setting variable is being updated and a notification image indicating that the setting value is being confirmed are displayed.

  After the setting value related notification process is executed in 207SGS412, the sub game stop process is executed (40FS001). In the sub-side game stop processing, for the production control CPU 120 to stop the game when the production control command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The process is executed. Details of the sub-side game stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 13-3.

  After the sub-side game stop processing is executed in 40FS001, it is determined whether or not the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416). When the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is not received (207SGS416; N), the process proceeds to 207SGS412, and when the set value change end notification command and the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y) Proceeds to 207 SGS427.

  FIG. 13-3 is a flowchart showing a sub-side game stop process in the characteristic unit 40F executed in 40FS001. The effect control CPU 120 stores the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the CPU 103 in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122. Then, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command stored in the effect control command reception buffer.

  In the sub-side game stop processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first fluctuation start command has been received (40FS010). When it is determined that the first variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS011. When it is determined that the first fluctuation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the first variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby causing the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS011, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second variation start command has been received. When it is determined that the second variation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS012. When it is determined that the second variation start command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The production control CPU 120 discards the second variation start command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, thereby displaying the variation of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5. It is possible not to execute the control to be performed. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS012, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS013. When it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The control CPU 120 for effect control controls the image display device 5 by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation pattern designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and performing the variable display of the small designs at all times. Can be prevented from running. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS013, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the special winning opening open designation command is received. If it is determined that the command for opening special winning opening is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS014. When it is determined that the special winning opening open designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The CPU 120 for effect control updates the display of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the special winning opening opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You can turn it off. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS014, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not the first start winning opening designation command has been received. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS015. When it is determined that the first start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the first start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the first hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS015, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the second start winning opening designation command is received. When it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is not received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. If it is determined that the second start winning opening designation command is received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 discards the second start winning opening designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state so that the hold display of the second hold information by operating the image display device 5 is not displayed. can do. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS016, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a symbol designating command has been received. If it is determined that the symbol designating command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS016. When it is determined that the symbol designating command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can cancel the winning-at-end hold change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the symbol designating command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. . Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS017, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not the variation type designation command is received. If it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the processing of 40FS018. When it is determined that the fluctuation type designation command has been received, the received command is discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can avoid executing the winning flash effect by controlling the lamp to be emitted by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may not execute the prize-winning change effect by operating the image display device 5 by discarding the variation type designation command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. it can. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS018, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command receiving buffer and determines whether or not a test command has been received. Here, the test command is a command directly transmitted to the production control board 12 from a device that sends a command for confirming the state of the screen or the state of the accessory provided in the gaming machine at the time of factory shipment. . When transmitting the test command, various test commands are transmitted in a state in which a transmission device dedicated to transmitting the test command is connected to the effect control board 12.

  When it is determined in 40FS018 that the test command has not been received, the process proceeds to 40FS019. When it is determined that the test command is received, the control according to the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state (40FS020). For example, the effect control CPU 120 operates the image display device 5 based on the reception of the test command for checking the liquid crystal of the image display device 5 during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and thereby the predetermined control is performed. Display the check screen. In this way, the processing based on the reception of the test command is executed even in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

  In 40FS019, the effect control CPU 120 checks the effect control command reception buffer and determines whether or not a command other than the setting change end notification command or the setting confirmation end notification command has been received (40FS019). These commands are, for example, the commands shown in FIG. 13-1. If it is determined that these commands have not been received, the processing ends. When it is determined that these commands have been received, the received commands are discarded (40FS021). The effect control CPU 120 can prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from performing an effect by discarding these commands during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, the process ends.

(About the effect of the characteristic part)
As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the variation pattern designation command even if the variation pattern designation command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. Do not perform control based on reception. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received, the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command are received. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120, when being controlled to the setting confirmation state, receives the first variation start command and the second variation start command, and then outputs the first variation start command and the second variation start command. Since the fluctuation start command is discarded, the control based on the reception of the first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

  As shown in FIG. 13-3, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting change state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the special winning opening opening specifying command even if the special winning opening opening specifying command is received while being controlled to the setting confirmation state. The control based on the reception of the special winning opening designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

  As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting change state, even if the first start winning a prize opening designation command and the second starting winning a prize opening designation command are received, the first starting award winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

  As shown in FIG. 13-3, when the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to the setting confirmation state, even if the first start winning opening designation command and the second starting winning opening designation command are received, the first starting winning prize. Since the mouth designation command and the second start winning a prize opening designation command are discarded, the control based on the reception of the first start winning a prize designation command and the second start winning a prize designation command is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting confirmation state.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command when being controlled to the setting change state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received during the setting change state.

  As shown in FIG. 13-3, the production control CPU 120 discards the symbol designating command and the variation type command while being controlled to the setting confirmation state, and therefore, is based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and the variation type command. Do not execute control. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the winning lamp and the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting confirmation state.

  As shown in FIG. 13C, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the command from the CPU 103, but thereafter discards the received command as in 40FS021. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 from malfunctioning even if an irregular command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Further, since the received command is discarded and no information remains, even if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state ends, no erroneous command remains and no malfunction is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 13-2, based on the reception of the setting value change start notification command, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting change state is set, and the reception of the setting value confirmation start notification command Based on the above, the setting for displaying the image notifying that the setting confirmation state is set is made. By doing so, it is possible to indicate that the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and even if the irregular display command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the image display device 5 or the like. It is possible to prevent the predetermined rendering means from malfunctioning.

  As indicated by 40FS020 in FIG. 13C, the control according to the test command is executed even when the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. With this configuration, even when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled, it is possible to execute the operation of the predetermined effect means such as the image display device 5 based on the test command.

(Regarding the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portion 40F has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present example, and other changes or additions may be made within the scope not departing from the gist of another invention. Included in the invention. Below, the modification of the characteristic part 40F is demonstrated.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the analysis of the effect control command reception buffer for each command transmitted while being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, instead of sequentially analyzing the commands and discarding them one by one, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, the CPU 103 may send an initialization command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 based on the end of the setting change state. Then, based on the reception of the initialization command, all the commands stored in the effect control command reception buffer may be discarded. Further, even in the setting confirmation state, all the commands stored in the effect control command receiving buffer may be discarded based on the reception of the predetermined command.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the control based on the effect control command is not executed even when the effect control command other than the command related to the setting change or the setting check is received when the setting change state or the setting check state is controlled. explained. However, the processing based on the reception of the effect control command may be internally executed while the control is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Even in such a case, the control executed when being controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has a higher priority than the control based on the reception of the other effect control command. On the screen of the image display device 5, an image according to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is visually displayed. Regarding the sound, during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, channels other than the channel outputting the notification sound during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state may be muted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the process of analyzing the command received when the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is controlled is executed. However, when the command is received in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may not be analyzed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the image display device 5 and the lamp at the time of winning the prize have been described as the predetermined effect means operated by the effect control CPU 120 when the effect control command is received. However, the predetermined effect means may be any one as long as the effect control means 120 is executed based on the reception of the command. For example, the operation means operated by the player or a movable member provided in the game machine may be used as the predetermined effect means. In such a case, when the operation means vibrates or the movable member operates due to the reception of a predetermined command, commands for executing these operations are received during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. Even if it is done, the control for discarding the command may be executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, a command other than the command for ending the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, such as the setting value change end notification command or the setting value confirmation end notification command, is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. You may control not to do it.

  In the above-described embodiment, a lamp provided in the gaming machine may be caused to emit light or sound may be output from a speaker together with the control for operating the image display device 5. In such a case, the command may be discarded when a command related to a lamp or a speaker is received so that the effect means does not operate during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the notice effect based on the reception of the symbol designating command or the variation type command is executed. However, the notice effect to be executed may be executed by receiving one of the commands, and when the command related to the variation pattern command is transmitted due to the occurrence of the start winning, the command related to the variation pattern is executed. You may make it perform a notice production based on. In such a case, even if a command related to the variation pattern is received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the command may be discarded.

  In the above-described embodiment, the advance notice lottery to be executed may be executed based on the symbol designating command or the variation type command being received during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Then, various types of advance notice may not be executed by determining that the advance notice is not executable at the timing of determining whether or not the advance notice is actually executable. Also, when executing the pre-reading notice production in continuous variable display other than when winning, the notice lottery is executed based on the receipt of the symbol designating command and variation type command during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. However, if the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is finished at the timing of actually starting the advance notice, the advance notice may be executed based on the received command.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the command received in the processing of 40FS021 in 40FS001 is discarded has been described. However, the timing of discarding the received command may be the timing after it is determined that the set value change end notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (207SGS416; Y). By doing so, when a plurality of irregular commands are received, the commands can be discarded at once.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an irregular command is received once during the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, a restriction may be applied so that another irregular command is not received thereafter. Good.

(Explanation regarding the association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the characteristic part may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to another characteristic part. The feature parts combined in this way or the individual feature parts that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of the respective configurations relating to the other feature parts.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of other inventions is shown not by the above description but by the scope of the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the scope of the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 11 main board, 12 production control board, 100 game control microcomputer, 103 CPU, 120 production control CPU.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
A production movable body capable of changing into a plurality of types of modes including the first mode and the second mode;
Holding storage means capable of storing information on variable display as holding storage;
Corresponding to the hold storage, hold display means capable of displaying the hold display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode and a second display mode,
The production movable body,
When the hold display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
When the hold display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
The case where the hold display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the hold display is displayed in the first display mode,
further,
A game control means capable of advancing a game,
Based on the information from the game control means, production control means capable of controlling the production,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a setting change means capable of controlling a setting change state capable of changing the set value, and
The effect control means is capable of causing a predetermined effect means to perform an operation based on information designating execution of variable display,
A game machine in which the predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting change state. A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
A production movable body capable of changing into a plurality of types of modes including the first mode and the second mode;
A specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display,
The specific display means can display the specific display in a plurality of types of display modes including a first display mode and a second display mode,
The production movable body,
When the specific display is displayed in the first display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the second display mode, it can be changed to the first mode or the second mode,
The case where the specific display is displayed in the second display mode is more likely to change to the second mode than the case where the specific display is displayed in the first display mode,
further,
A game control means capable of advancing a game,
Based on the information from the game control means, production control means capable of controlling the production,
Setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different degrees of advantage for the player,
Based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the setting confirmation means capable of controlling the setting confirmation state to confirm the setting value,
The effect control means is capable of causing a predetermined effect means to perform an operation based on information designating execution of variable display,
A game machine in which the predetermined effect means does not execute an operation based on information designating execution of variable display while being controlled to the setting confirmation state.